Transitions & Phrases Flashcards
List
WHO - WHAT - WHERE - WHEN - WHY - HOW - CAN - WILL
BECAUSE - SINCE - THUS - FOLLOWING
άλλο πάλι και τούτο (állo páli kai toúto)
άνευ τούτου (ánev toútou, “without it”)
επί τούτω (epí toúto, “ad hoc”)
επί τούτοις (epí toútois, “intentionally”)
και τούτο και το άλλο (kai toúto kai to állo, “this and that”)
καλό και τούτο (kaló kai toúto)
προς τούτο (pros toúto)
προς τούτοις (pros toútois, “moreover”)
τούτου δοθέντος (toútou dothéntos, “therefore, ergo”)
ως εκ τούτου (os ek toútou, “therefore, ergo”)
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
WHO -WHAT - WHICH - THIS - THAT
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun
Transliteration: hos, hé, ho
Phonetic Spelling: (hos)
Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Usage: who, which, what, that.
ἄν
ἐᾱ́ν
εἰ
ἐπεί
SUBJUNCTIVE IRREALIS PARTICLE
IF - CONDITIONALLY - POSSIBLY - MAYBE
WOULD - COULD - SHOULD
Conjunction
ἐᾱ́ν • (eā́n)
(“if”)
(for more depth see εἰ (ei) and ἄν (án)
Conjunction
εἰ • (ei)
if
Conjunction
ἐπεί • (epeí)
(of time) after, after that, since, when
From ἐπί (epí, “on”) + εἰ (ei, “if”).
(with subjunctive, ἄν (án) often being added)
(referring to future time)
(referring generally to any one of a number of instances, with a present apodosis of repeated action) whenever, when once
(with optative, without ἄν (án))
(referring to future time)
(more frequently, referring generally to any one of a number of past instances, with a past apodosis of repeated action)
(in indirect speech after past tenses, representing a subjunctive in direct speech)
ἄν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: an
Phonetic Spelling: (an)
Definition: usually untranslatable, but generally denoting supposition, wish, possibility or uncertainty
Usage: an untranslatable word (under the circumstances, in that case, anyhow), the general effect of which is to make a statement contingent, which would otherwise be definite: it is thus regularly used with the subjunctive mood.
302 án – a conditional particle expressing possibility, based on a preexisting condition (stipulation, prerequisite). This adds an important theoretical (hypothetical) sense to a statement which narrows down the sense of that statement.
302 (an) “indicates what can (could) occur – but only on certain conditions, or by the combination of certain fortuitous causes” (J. Thayer). Only the context determines how 302 (án) “limits” (“conditions”) the statement by the possibility (condition) involved. Accordingly, 302 (án) is often called the “untranslatable particle.” However, it always influences (“conditions”) its sentence and is key to properly understanding the verse (passage) in which it occurs.
[Though 302 (án) is not easily “translatable,” it always conveys important meaning. (The KJV sometimes translates an as “perchance,” “haply.”)
302 (an) is used about 300 times in the NT, introducing statements that have conditional or hypothetical meaning.]
ἄν
POSSIBLY - HYPOTHETICALLY - MAYBE - CONDITIONALLY
ἄν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: an
Phonetic Spelling: (an)
Definition: usually untranslatable, but generally denoting supposition, wish, possibility or uncertainty
Usage: an untranslatable word (under the circumstances, in that case, anyhow), the general effect of which is to make a statement contingent, which would otherwise be definite: it is thus regularly used with the subjunctive mood.
302 án – a conditional particle expressing possibility, based on a preexisting condition (stipulation, prerequisite). This adds an important theoretical (hypothetical) sense to a statement which narrows down the sense of that statement.
302 (an) “indicates what can (could) occur – but only on certain conditions, or by the combination of certain fortuitous causes” (J. Thayer). Only the context determines how 302 (án) “limits” (“conditions”) the statement by the possibility (condition) involved. Accordingly, 302 (án) is often called the “untranslatable particle.” However, it always influences (“conditions”) its sentence and is key to properly understanding the verse (passage) in which it occurs.
[Though 302 (án) is not easily “translatable,” it always conveys important meaning. (The KJV sometimes translates an as “perchance,” “haply.”)
302 (an) is used about 300 times in the NT, introducing statements that have conditional or hypothetical meaning.]
θα
WILL - FUTURE TENSE - CONDITIONAL
Forms the continuous or imperfective future tense.
Forms the simple or perfective future tense.
Forms the conditional mood.
Particle
θα • (tha)
added before the present verb forms to form the continuous or imperfective future tense:
Θα τον προσέχω όλη μου τη ζωή.
Tha ton prosécho óli mou ti zoḯ.
I will watch over him for the rest of my life.
Ο αδελφός μου θα βλέπει την σειρά όσο συνεχίσει.
O adelfós mou tha vlépei tin seirá óso synechísei.
My brother will be watching that series as long as it continues.
Ας γκρινιάζει, εγώ θα πηγαίνω εκεί όσο θέλω.
As gkriniázei, egó tha pigaíno ekeí óso thélo.
Let him moan, I’ll go there for as long as I want.
added before the dependent verb forms to form the simple or perfective future tense:
Αύριο, θα δούμε μια ταινία στο σινεμά.
Ávrio, tha doúme mia tainía sto sinemá.
Tomorrow, we’ll see a film at the cinema.
Σου υπόσχομαι ότι δεν θα πω τίποτα.
Sou ypóschomai óti den tha po típota.
I promise you I won’t say anything.
Όταν το δει η μάνα μου, θα με σκοτώσει!
Ótan to dei i mána mou, tha me skotósei!
When my mother sees it, she’ll kill me!
added before the present forms of έχω (écho) and the non-finite to form some types of the future perfect:
Μέχρι να γυρίσεις από την αγορά, θα έχω τελειώσει.
Méchri na gyríseis apó tin agorá, tha écho teleiósei.
By the time you come back from the market, I will have finished.
Τον Ιανουάριο, θα έχω δουλέψει εκεί είκοσι χρόνια.
Ton Ianouário, tha écho doulépsei ekeí eíkosi chrónia.
In January, I will have worked there twenty years.
added before the imperfect forms of έχω (écho) and the non-finite to form some types of the pluperfect:
Θα είχα πάει να κοιμηθώ, γι’ αυτό δεν σε άκουσα.
Tha eícha páei na koimithó, gi’ aftó den se ákousa.
I would have gone to sleep, that’s why I didn’t hear you.
added before the imperfect verb forms to form the conditional mood:
Αν δεν είχα φρενάρει, θα τον σκότωνα.
An den eícha frenárei, tha ton skótona.
If I hadn’t braked, I would have killed him.
Τι θα γινόταν αν πατούσα αυτό το κουμπί;
Ti tha ginótan an patoúsa aftó to koumpí?
What would happen if I pressed this button?
Εγώ σ’ αυτή την περίπτωση, θα του έλεγα να φύγει.
Egó s’ aftí tin períptosi, tha tou élega na fýgei.
In that case, I’d tell him to leave.
να
TO - SHOULD - CAN - MAY - MAYBE - POSSIBLY - WISH
SUBJUNCTIVE - FORMS HYPOTHETICALS
να (na, “subjunctive particle”)
να είναι
(“to be”)
Particle
να • (na)
added before the dependent or present verb forms to form the different subjunctive moods, serving a variety of different clausal functions and to express imperatives, wishes or hypotheticals:
Μπορώ να έχω…
Boró na écho…
Can I have…
Θέλω να φύγω.
Thélo na fýgo.
I want to leave.
Να μείνω ή να φύγω;
Na meíno í na fýgo?
Should I stay or should I go?
Δεν θέλω να τον βλέπω.
Den thélo na ton vlépo.
I don’t want to be seeing him.
Δεν έχω όρεξη να κάθομαι εκεί επί ώρες.
Den écho órexi na káthomai ekeí epí óres.
I’m not in the mood to be sitting there for hours.
Να προσέχεις τον εαυτό σου.
Na prosécheis ton eaftó sou.
Take care of yourself.
Να ’χεις το νου σου.
Na ’cheis to nou sou.
Be aware/be on the lookout.
Να είχαμε πέντε λεπτά ακόμα.
Na eíchame pénte leptá akóma.
If only we had five more minutes.
used after the neuter definite article and before the second person singular of the present tense, it converts the clause to a noun phrase with the function of gerund:
Το να κλέβεις τις ιδέες ενός είναι «λογοκλοπή», το να κλέβεις τις ιδέες πολλών είναι «επιστημονική έρευνα».
To na kléveis tis idées enós eínai «logoklopí», to na kléveis tis idées pollón eínai «epistimonikí érevna».
Stealing ideas from one person is “plagiarism”, stealing from many is “research”.
Particle να • (na) used to show or point out someone or something: there, here Να τα προβλήματά μου. Na ta provlímatá mou. These are my problems.
Να ’τος! (’τος here is a contraction of αυτός (aftós))
Na ’tos!
There he is!
Να ’μαστε πάλι εδώ Αντρέα! (’μαστε here is a contraction of είμαστε (eímaste))
Na ’maste páli edó Antréa!
Here we are again, Andrea!
when used with the hand gesture moutza, indicates of displeasure or anger:
Να! Παρ’ τα!
Na! Par’ ta!
There! Take that!
(vulgar) when used with a hand gesture pointing to own genitals, means “I don’t give a shit”:
Κι εμένα, να!
Ki eména, na!
As for myself I don’t give a shit!
ας
HORTATIVE AND JUSIVE MOODS (LET!)
Particle ας • (as) added before the dependent or present verb forms to form the hortative and jussive moods: Ας πάμε! As páme! Let’s go!
Ας γκρινιάζει.
As gkriniázei.
Let him moan.
more literally as an imperative, leave off:
Ας τ’ αστεία!
As t’ asteía!
Leave off the jokes!
from Ancient Greek ἀφές (aphés, “let!”).
ἀφῑ́ημῐ • (aphī́ēmi)
to send forth, discharge, emit
to let fall from one’s grasp
(in prose) to send forth, dispatch
to give up or hand over
to send away
(of people)
to let go, loose, set free
to let go, dissolve, disband, break up, dismiss
to put away, divorce
to let go as an ἄφετος (áphetos)
(of things) to get rid of, shed, give up
(with πλοῖον (ploîon)) to set sail
(law) to remit, excuse
to leave alone, pass by, not notice
(with accusative and infitive) to donate to public property
(with accusative and infinitive) to allow, let, permit
Antonym: ἐμποδίζω (empodízō)
(seemingly intransitive) to break up, march, sail
(with infinitive) to give up doing
(in middle voice) to send forth from oneself
to loose something of one’s own
(often in Attic, with genitive) to let go of
From ἀπό (“from, away from”) + ἵημι (híēmi, “to send, throw”)
Verb
αφήνω • (afíno) (past άφησα, passive αφήνομαι, p‑past αφέθηκα, ppp αφημένος)
leave, allow, let, let go, let go of, drop, drop off, abandon.
άφησε το μολύβι του να πέσει στο πάτωμα
áfise to molývi tou na pései sto pátoma
he let the pencil fall to the floor
άφησα το πορτοφόλι μου πάνω στο τραπέζι
áfisa to portofóli mou páno sto trapézi
I left my wallet on the table.
αφήστε με ήσυχη (άστε με ήσυχη)
afíste me ísychi (áste me ísychi)
leave me alone (feminine).
τον άφησαν ελεύθερο
ton áfisan eléfthero
they set it free
ῑ̔́ημῐ • (hī́ēmi) I release, let go (of sounds) I utter, speak, say I throw, shoot, hurl (of water) I let flow, flow, spout forth I send (middle) I speed myself, hasten (middle, with infinitive) I am eager, I desire (to do something) (middle, with genitive) I am set upon, long for
Noun
αφετηρία • (afetiría) f (plural αφετηρίες)
(sports) startline, starting line
(transport) point of departure, terminus
(figuratively) the start of something new
αφέτης m (afétis, “starter”)
Conjunction
ἐᾱ́ν • (eā́n)
if (for more depth see εἰ (ei) and ἄν (án)
τέ
BOTH / ALSO / AND — DENOTES ADDITION OR CONNECTION BUT WAIT (there’s more)
A weaker conjunction than καὶ.
te: τέ (“and”)- (denotes addition or connection)
τε
(“And”) [ a weaker conjunction than καὶ ]
Conj
καὶ
and
Conj
Original Word: τέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: te
Phonetic Spelling: (teh)
Definition: and (denotes addition or connection)
Usage: and, both.
HELPS Word-studies
5037 té (a conjunction) – “and both” (“both and”). 5037 /té (“and both”) occurs 204 times in the NT and unfortunately is often not translated.
[When translated, 5037 (té) is usually rendered “and,” “both and,” or “and both.”]
γε
AT LEAST - AT ANY RATE - IN FACT
(Limiting, Intensifying)
Particle γε • (ge) (discourse particle) often translatable with italics or stress (limiting) at least, at any rate, only (intensifying) in fact
δὲ
NEXT - THEN - AND THEN - NOW THEN - HOWEVER
BUT WAIT (If you thought that was bad)
TRULY! - EXACTLY! - PRECISELY!
δὲ
however
Conj
Particle δή • (dḗ) (discourse particle) Adds temporal specificity: (“now, already”) Adds emphasis: (“truly, !”) Adds specificity: (“exactly”) With pronouns: (“of all people”)
From Ancient Greek δέ (“and, but”)
Conjunction
δε • (de)
also, but also
ευχαριστώ, αλλά δε θα πάρω (“thanks, but no thanks”)
δέ is a postpositive word: it is never the first word in a sentence. It is usually the second but sometimes also the third or fourth.
It is often used together with μέν (mén).
Particle
μέν • (mén) (discourse particle)
on the one hand, while, whereas (often left untranslated)
(before other particles) accordingly, and so
δὲ
now
Conj
Second word in a sentence (a transitional phrase)
ἠκολούθει δὲ, αὐτῷ ὄχλος πολύς
Following then, him crowd many,
Next, a great crowd was following him,
ἀνῆλθεν δὲ εἰς τὸ ὄρος ἰησοῦς,
Went then, Jesus up to the mountain,
Then, Jesus went up to the mountain,
ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ πάσχα,
Was being now, near the Passover,
τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγεν πειράζων αὐτόν,
Now then, these words were testing him,
ἦν δὲ χόρτος πολὺς ἐν τῶ τόπῳ.
Now then, there was a lot of grass in that place.
ὡς δὲ ὀψία ἐγένετο
Then, when it became evening,
τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός,
Now then, this is the will of the one having sent me,
ὡς δὲ ἐνεπλήσθησαν λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ,
And then, when they were filled he said to his disciples,
ὁ δὲ λέγει αὐτοῖς,
Now, the One says to them,
εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ ἰησοῦς ἐν ἑαυτῶ ὅτι γογγύζουσιν περὶ τούτου οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς,
However, Jesus knew in himself the disciples were grumbling about him,
ἔλεγεν δὲ τὸν ἰούδαν σίμωνος ἰσκαριώτου· οὖτος γὰρ ἔμελλεν παραδιδόναι αὐτόν,
And then, he was speaking about Simon Iscariot who was to betray him and hand him over to the Roman soldiers,
Ἰούδας - Judas
ἐγὼ δὲ οὐ παρὰ ἀνθρώπου τὴν μαρτυρίαν λαμβάνω,
Now then I do not recur testimony from the man,
ἐγὼ δὲ ἔχω τὴν μαρτυρίαν μείζω τοῦ ἰωάννου
However, I have received greater witness testimony that John,
εἰ δὲ τοῖς ἐκείνου γράμμασιν οὐ πιστεύετε,
If now then the writings you do not believe,
καί δέ
but … also
yea and, moreover also:
μᾶλλον δέ
Rather however
νῦν δέ
Now however
εἰ δέ
If on the other hand
Ὅτι δέ
Because on the contrary however
Ὅτε δέ ἦλθεν
When however he had come
Λέγω δέ, ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ὁ κληρονόμος νήπιός ἐστιν
I say now, for as long a time as the heir is an uneducated child…
ἐστι δέ, στοιχεῖον, ἐξ οὗ πρώτου γίνεται τά γινόμενα καί εἰς ὁ ἔσχατον ἀναλύεται
It is however, a fundamental principle, out from not of the first come into being the resulting product and into the last i analyze.
ὅταν δέ, αὐξηθῇ μεῖζον τῶν λαχάνων
When however, it is grown greater than garden plants
Ἔδει δὲ αὐτὸν διέρχεσθαι διὰ τῆς Σαμαρείας
It was necessary for now him to pass through to Samaria.
———————————————————-
ἰούδαν
Ἰούδας
Judah or Judas = “he shall be praised”
the fourth son of Jacob
an unknown ancestor of Christ
a man surnamed the Galilean, who at the time of the census of Quirinus, excited the revolt in Galilee, Acts 5:
a certain Jew of Damascus, Acts 9:
a prophet surnamed Barsabas, of the church at Jerusalem, Acts 15:22,27,
the apostle, Jn 14:22, who was surnamed Lebbaeus or Thaddaeus, and according to opinion wrote the Epistle of Jude.
Translations of betray
Verb
προδίδω
betray, squeal, bespeak, give away, sell out
αποκαλύπτω
disclose, reveal, uncover, divulge, unveil, betray
δέ
NOW - BUT - BUT NOW - BUT ON THE OTHER HAND
ALSO - NEXT THING - HOWEVER - FOLLOWING NEXT
δὲ
however
Conj
Particle δή • (dḗ) (discourse particle) Adds temporal specificity: (“now, already”) Adds emphasis: (“truly, !”) Adds specificity: (“exactly”) With pronouns: (“of all people”)
δὲ
also
Conj
(a conjunction) moreover indeed now on top of this next . . .
δὲ
however
Conj
δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . . .
universally, by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opposed to a preceding statement.
it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of — either with strong emphasis.
it is joined to terms which are repeated with a certain emphasis, and with such additions as tend to explain and establish them more exactly; in this use of the particle we may supply a suppressed negative clause and give its force in English by inserting I say, and that, so then, etc.
it serves to mark a transition to something new (δέ metabatic); by this use of the particle, the new addition is distinguished from and, as it were, opposed to what goes before.
it introduces the apodosis and, as it were, opposes it to the protasis.
δέ never stands as the first word in the sentence, but generally second; and when the words to which it is added cannot be separated, it stands third.
καί … δέ, but … also, yea and, moreover also:
δέ
ON THE OTHER HAND - BUT RATHER - MOREOVER
Particle δή • (dḗ) (discourse particle) Adds temporal specificity: (“now, already”) Adds emphasis: (“truly, !”) Adds specificity: (“exactly”) With pronouns: (“of all people”)
but, and, now,
(a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause;.
but, on the other hand, and.
1161 dé (a conjunction) –
moreover, indeed now . . . ,
on top of this . . . ,
next . . .
δέ
BUT - AND - NOW - MOREOVER - NEVERTHELESS
de: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Original Word: δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
HELPS Word-studies
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . . .
but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
NASB Translation
after (2), also (2), another* (8), even (4), even though (1), former* (1), however (6), moreover (1), moreover* (1), nevertheless (1), now (267), or (6), other (1), other hand (4), others* (3), partly (1), rather (1), so (12), suppose* (1), then (6), therefore (1), though (1), what (1), when (3), whereas (2), yes (1), yet (25).
μετά δέ
AFTER THEN
Μετὰ
After
Prep
δὲ
then
Conj
μετά Part of Speech: Preposition Transliteration: meta Phonetic Spelling: (met-ah') Definition: with, among, after Usage: (a) gen: with, in company with, (b) acc: (1) behind, beyond, after, of place, (2) after, of time, with nouns, neut. of adjectives.
3326 metá (a preposition) – properly, with (“after with”), implying “change afterward” (i.e. what results after the activity). As an active “with,” 3326 (metá) looks towards the after-effect (change, result) which is only defined by the context.
[3326 (metá) before a vowel is written met (meth).]
—————————————————-
de: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Original Word: δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
HELPS Word-studies
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . . .
μηδὲ
POSSIBLY NOT, BUT THEN
From μή (“not probable, conditional, possible”) + δέ (“and, but”).
μή • (mḗ) (negative particle)
not (used in clauses expressing will or thought)
(with an imperative or subjunctive in negative commands)
(with an optative or past indicative, expressing a negative wish)
(in a question expecting a negative answer)
(in dependent clauses)
(with participle representing conditional clause)
(in warnings or statements of fear)
(in independent clauses) that … not; that
(introducing indirect statement after verb of fearing or apprehension) that
μηδὲ
nor
Conj
μηδ’ (mēd’) – apocopic
Compare οὐδέ (oudé, “but not, and not”)
Conjunction
μηδέ • (mēdé)
(connecting two clauses, used with the same constructions as μή (mḗ)) but not, and not, nor
(doubled, μηδέ…μηδέ, opposing the two clauses of a sentence)
Adverb[edit]
μηδέ • (mēdé)
(joined with a single word or phrase) not even
οὐδέ
FACTUALLY NOT, BUT THEN
From οὐ (“not a fact”) + δέ (“but”)
οὐδ’ (oud’) – apocopic
Conjunction
οὐδέ • (oudé)
(mostly answering to μέν (mén)) but not
(more often) and not, nor
(without a negative preceding)
(with a simple negative preceding)
Adverb
οὐδέ • (oudé)
not even, not at all
When οὐδέ (oudé) is repeated at the beginning of two clauses, the first is often adverbial and the second is a conjunction. It may also follow οὔτε (oúte), as an anacoluthon.
μέν
μήν
INDEED - AFFIRM - CONFIRM - YES - AGREED - EXACTLY
I CONCEDE - YOU’RE RIGHT - WHAT YOU SAY IS TRUE
μήν - (primarily true, I assert it as true, I know it to be true, I am certain)
μέν - (secondarily true, conceded to you, agree with you, I affirm you)
ἀμήν (verily)
ἦ μήν (absolutely true)
καὶ μήν - (and truly indeed)
αλλὰ μήν - (but on the other hand it surely is)
οὐ μήν - (certainly not a fact)
μήτε μήν - (surely not then, but truly not)
τί μήν - (How true! Of course, naturally)
ὅς μέν - (that is the one indeed)
ὅς δέ - (indeed, it is the one on the other hand)
ὅς μέν ὅς δέ - (truly this one or the other one)
μέν δέ - (indeed … but, yet, on the other hand)
μέν (Concede)
μήν (Confirm!)
ἀμήν (Absolutely True!)
(ἦ μήν) absolutely
(καὶ μήν) used to introduce something new or convey affirmation
(αλλὰ μήν) yet truly, on the other hand
(οὐ μήν) certainly not
(μήτε μήν) not even
(after interrogatives, τί μήν) of course, naturally
(after a negative) applies an adversative force.
Particle
μέν • (mén) (discourse particle)
on the one hand, while, whereas (often left untranslated)
(before other particles) accordingly, and so
μέν
even, indeed, some, truly, verily
A primary particle; properly, indicative of affirmation or concession (in fact); usually followed by a contrasted clause with δέ (this one, the former, etc.) – even, indeed, so, some, truly, verily. Often compounded with other particles in an intensive or asseverative sense.
μέν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: men
Phonetic Spelling: (men)
μέν
Definition: shows affirmation or concession.
Usage: an untranslatable particle, generally answered by de, each of the two introducing a clause intended to be contrasted with the other.
3303 mén (a conjunction) – indeed, verily (truly).
μέν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence, properly a particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, indeed — its affirmative force being weakened, yet retained most Greek prose.
Owing to this its original meaning it adds a certain force to the terms and phrases with which it is connected, and thus contrasts them with or distinguishes them from others.
Accordingly, it takes on the character of a concessive and very often of a merely distinctive particle, which stands related to a following δέ or other adversative conjunction, either expressed or understood, and in a sentence composed of several members is so placed as to point out the first member, to which a second, marked by an adversative particle, is added or opposed.
Those in which μέν has a concessive force, and δέ (or ἀλλά) introduces a restriction, correction, or amplification of what has been said in the former member, indeed … but, yet, on the other hand. Persons or things, or predications about either, are thus correlated.
οἱ μέν
οἱ δέ
μέν and δέ are added to articles and pronouns: οἱ μέν … οἱ δέ, the one indeed … but the other (although the latter, yet the former)
ὅς μέν
ὅς δέ
the one indeed, but (yet) the other etc.
τινες μέν
τινες δέ καί
Τινὲς μὲν καὶ διὰ
Some indeed even from
Τινὲς
Some
IPro-NMP
μὲν
indeed
Conj
καὶ
and even
Conj
διὰ
from
Prep
Τινὲς μὲν καὶ διὰ
Some however also from
τινὲς
some
IPro-NMP
δὲ
however (adversarial particle)
Conj
καὶ
also
Conj
δι’
from
Prep
those in which μέν loses its concessive force and serves only to distinguish, but δέ retains its adversative power
ὅς μέν … ὅς δέ
and one … and another
εἰ μέν οὖν … εἰ δέ, Acts 18:14f (R G); (L T Tr WH); and this happens chiefly when what has already been included in the words immediately preceding is separated into parts, so that the adversative particle contrasts that which the writer especially desires to contrast:
μέν … truly, affirmative
δέ serve only to distribute a sentence into clauses:
both … and; not only … but also; as well … as
τοῦτο μέν … τοῦτο δέ
on the one hand … on the other; partly … partly
—————————————————————— Particle μήν • (mḗn) (discourse particle) used to strengthen statements: verily, surely, truly, definitely (after other particles)
(ἦ μήν) absolutely
(καὶ μήν) used to introduce something new or convey affirmation
(αλλὰ μήν) yet truly, on the other hand
(οὐ μήν) certainly not
(μήτε μήν) not even
(after interrogatives, τί μήν) of course, naturally
(after a negative) applies an adversative force.
μήν
used to strengthen statements: surely, truly, definitely
(after other particles)
(ἦ μήν) absolutely
(καὶ μήν) used to introduce something new or convey affirmation
(αλλὰ μήν) yet truly, on the other hand
(οὐ μήν) certainly not
(μήτε μήν) not even
(after interrogatives, τί μήν) of course, naturally
(after a negative) applies an adversative force.
μὴν
noun: nominative singular masculine
μῆνα
noun: accusative singular masculine
μῆνας
noun: accusative plural masculine
μηνὶ
noun: dative singular masculine
—————————————————————————-
AMEN
ἀμήν
Part of Speech: Hebrew Form (Indclinable)
Transliteration: amén
Phonetic Spelling: (am-ane’)
Definition: truly
Usage: verily, truly, amen; at the end of sentences may be paraphrased by: So let it be.
281 amḗn (the counterpart of the Hebrew OT term, 543 /apeítheia, “steadfast”) – properly, sure (certain). 281 (amḗn) is usually translated “amen,” and sometimes “verily,” “of a truth,” “most assuredly,” “so let it be.”
281 /amḗn (“amen”), as an “emphasis marker,” introduces a statement of pivotal importance – i.e. that is essential in interpreting the over-all passage.
Adverb
ᾱ̓μήν • (āmḗn)
truly, certainly
so be it
Borrowed from Biblical Hebrew אָמֵן (āmḗn, “so be it”, “surely”).
אָמֵן Part of Speech: adverb Transliteration: amen Phonetic Spelling: (aw-mane') Definition: verily, truly
אָמַן Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: aman Phonetic Spelling: (aw-man') Definition: to confirm, support
μέν
TRULY - INDEED - “MAY BE TRUE, BUT” (conjunction)
μέν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: men
Phonetic Spelling: (men)
Definition: shows affirmation or concession
Usage: an untranslatable particle, generally answered by de, each of the two introducing a clause intended to be contrasted with the other.
HELPS Word-studies
3303 mén (a conjunction) – indeed, verily (truly).
μέν
ON THE ONE HAND - WHEREAS (particle)
Particle
μέν • (mén) (discourse particle)
on the one hand, while, whereas (often left untranslated)
(before other particles) accordingly, and so
Usage: an untranslatable particle, generally answered by de, each of the two introducing a clause intended to be contrasted with the other.
-θεν
FROM - FROM WHICH PLACE
-θεν • (-then)
Added to nouns to form adverbs of place from which: from; also used, like genitive, with prepositions
https://en.wiktionary.org/wiki/Category:Ancient_Greek_words_suffixed_with_-θεν
Α
ἄλλοθεν
from another place
From ἄλλος (other, another) + -θεν (-then)
ἁμόθεν
from some place or time
From ἁμός (“something”) + -θεν (-then, ablative adverb suffix).
ἀμφοτέρωθεν
from or on both sides
ἀμφοτέρω (amphotérō, “both”) + -θεν (-then)
From ἄμφω (ámphō, “both”) + -τερος (-comparative form).
ἄνευθεν
Without, away from, away, far away
From ἄνευ (without) + -θεν (-comparative form)
ἄνωθεν
From above
From ἄνω (above, inland, upward)
ἀπάνευθε
From afar
From ἀπο- (outward, away from) + ἄνευ (without) + -θε (-the).
ἀπόπροθεν
from far off, from afar
From ἀποπρό (“long before”) + -θεν (-from)
αὐτόθεν
from oneself, of one’s own accord
From αὐτός (“the very, oneself”) + -θεν (“from”)
Ε
ἐγγύθεν
from nearby
From ἐγγῠ́ς (engús, “near”) + -θεν (“from”).
ἐγγῐ́ζω • (engízō)
to bring near, bring up to
(mostly intransitive) to come near, approach
From ἐγγῠ́ς (engús, “near”) + -ῐ́ζω (-ízō).
ἕθεν Pronoun ἕθεν • (héthen) (Epic) genitive singular of οὗ (hoû): his, her From ἕ (him) + -θεν (from which) Pronoun ἕ • (hé) accusative of οὗ (hoû): him -θεν • (-then) Added to nouns to form adverbs of place from which: from; also used, like genitive, with prepositions
ἑκάτερθεν
From each side, on each side, on either hand
Pronoun
ἑκᾰ́τερος • (hekáteros) (feminine ἑκᾰτέρᾱ, neuter ἑκᾰ́τερον)
each of two, each singly
ἑκατέρωθεν
on either side
ἑκᾰτέρω (hekatérō, “either”, dual) + -θεν (-from)
ἐκεῖθεν
from that place, thence
From ἐκεῖ (ekeî, “there”) + -θεν (-then)
ἐντεῦθεν (enteûthen, “hence”)
ἐντεῦθεν • (enteûthen)
from this or that place, hence or thence
from this or that time, henceforth, thereupon
from this or that source or cause, therefore
ἔνθεν • (énthen)
thence, from there
ἔκτοσθεν
From outside, Outside of
From ἔκτος (outer, outside) + -θεν (-from)
ἔνδοθεν
from within
From ἔνδον (éndon, “within”) + -θεν (-then, “from”).
ἔντοσθεν
from within
ἐντός (within, inner) + -θεν (-from)
ἑτέρωθεν
from the other side
ἕτερος (héteros) + -θεν (-then)
Adjective
ἕτερος • (héteros) m (feminine ἑτέρᾱ, neuter ἕτερον); first/second declension
one or the other of two
(repeated at a distance) either … or …
(repeated consecutively) one after the other
other, another, second (often of pairs)
different
From εἷς (heîs), “one”) + *-teros (contrastive suffix)
ἐφύπερθεν ἕωθεν Θ θύραθεν Ι Ἴδηθεν Κ καθύπερθεν κλισίηθεν Ν νειόθεν νέρθεν Ο ὅθεν οἴκοθεν ὄπισθεν οὐρανόθεν Π πανταχόθεν πάντοθεν πάροιθεν ποθεν πόθεν πρόσθεν Τ τηλόθεν Τροίηθεν Υ ὕπερθεν ὑψόθεν
Etymology From ἐν (en, “in”) + πρόσθεν (prósthen, “before”) ἔμπροσθεν • (émprosthen) (of place) before, in front (of time) before, earlier, of old
Preposition
ἔμπροσθεν • (émprosthen) (governs the genitive)
before
(of place)
Adverb
πρόσθεν • (prósthen)
(of place) before, in front
(of time) before, earlier, formerly
Preposition πρόσθεν • (prósthen) (governs the genitive) before (of time) (of degree)
From πρός (prós, “toward”) + -θεν (place from which…)
-θεν • (-then)
Added to nouns to form adverbs of place from which: from; also used, like genitive, with prepositions
————————————————————————————————-
————————————————————————————————-
Ἔδει from εἰ (if) + δέω (to bind)
IT WAS NECESSARY FOR
εἰ: forasmuch as, if, that
Original Word: εἰ Part of Speech: Conditional Particle Or Conjunction Transliteration: ei Phonetic Spelling: (i) Definition: forasmuch as, if, that Usage: if. HELPS Word-studies 1487 ei (a conditional conjunction) – if. 1487 /ei (followed by any verb) expresses "a condition, thought of as real, or to denote assumptions" (i.e. viewed as factual. for the sake of argument) (BAGD). Accordingly, 1487 (ei) should not be translated "since," but rather always "if" – since the assumption may only be portrayed as valid (true, factual).
A primary particle (“if, whether”) - (or a conditional particle introducing circumstances necessary for a given proposition to be true)
εἰ, ἰ: εἰ and ἰ are frequent interchanged in N. T. spelling. This is due partly to itacism, partly to the endeavor to mark the iota sound as long or short.
εἰ Conditional (on the difference between it and ἐάν, see ἐάν, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety of conditions, with various tenses and moods)
ε. followed by the imperfect, either with or without ἄν, where in the protasis something is simply assumed to be, but the apodosis shows that what has been assumed cannot be the case.
Not infrequently, when a conclusion is drawn from something that is quite certain, εἰ with the indicative is used argumentatively so as to be equivalent in sense to ἐπεί.
Matthew 4:3 Conj GRK: εἶπεν αὐτῷ Εἰ υἱὸς εἶ NAS: and said to Him, If You are the Son KJV: to him, he said, If thou be the Son INT: said to him If Son you are Matthew 4:6 Conj GRK: λέγει αὐτῷ Εἰ υἱὸς εἶ NAS: and said to Him, If You are the Son KJV: saith unto him, If thou be the Son INT: says to him If Son you are
Matthew 5:13 Conj
GRK: ἰσχύει ἔτι εἰ μὴ βληθὲν
INT: it is potent any longer if not having been cast
Matthew 5:29 Conj GRK: εἰ δὲ ὁ NAS: If your right eye KJV: And if thy right INT: if moreover the
Matthew 5:30 Conj GRK: καὶ εἰ ἡ δεξιά NAS: If your right hand KJV: And if thy right INT: And if the right
δεῖ Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: dei Phonetic Spelling: (die) Definition: it is necessary Usage: it is necessary, inevitable; less frequently: it is a duty, what is proper.
1163 deí – properly, what must happen, i.e. what is absolutely necessary (“it behooves that . . . “).
a form of deó
δέω Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: deó Phonetic Spelling: (deh'-o) Definition: to tie, bind Usage: I bind, tie, fasten; I impel, compel; I declare to be prohibited and unlawful.
τότε - from τό (“the) + τε (“both and”)
THEN AGAIN - ADDITIONALLY AT THAT TIME
From τό (“The - he,she, it”) + τε (“both and”)
τότε Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: tote Phonetic Spelling: (tot'-eh) Definition: then, at that time Usage: then, at that time. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin from the neut. of ho, and hote
ho, hé, to: the Original Word: ὁ, ἡ, τό Part of Speech: Definite Article Transliteration: ho, hé, to Phonetic Spelling: (ho) Definition: the Usage: the, the definite article.
ὅτε Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: hote Phonetic Spelling: (hot'-eh) Definition: when Usage: when, at which time. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin from hos, and te
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun
Transliteration: hos, hé, ho
Phonetic Spelling: (hos)
Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Usage: who, which, what, that.
τέ: (denotes addition or connection)
Original Word: τέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: te
Phonetic Spelling: (teh)
Definition: and (denotes addition or connection)
Usage: and, both.
HELPS Word-studies
5037 té (a conjunction) – “and both” (“both and”). 5037 /té (“and both”) occurs 204 times in the NT and unfortunately is often not translated.
[When translated, 5037 (té) is usually rendered “and,” “both and,” or “and both.”]
οὔτε = οὐ (“not a fact”) + τε (“both and”)
NOTHING
From οὐ (“ruling it out as fact”) + τε (“both and”)
οὔτε
nothing
Conj
οὔτε Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative Transliteration: oute Phonetic Spelling: (oo'-teh) Definition: and not, neither Usage: and not, neither, nor. HELPS Word-studies 3777 oúte (a conjunction derived from 3756 /ou, "not, denying as a fact" and 5037 /té, "also") – properly, nor (both not), neither also.
[3777 /oúte (“neither, nor”) occurs 87 times in the critical text and 94 times in the Textus Receptus.]
NAS Exhaustive Concordance
Word Origin
from ou, and te
οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
3756 ou – no (“not”). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
τέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: te
Phonetic Spelling: (teh)
Definition: and (denotes addition or connection)
Usage: and, both.
HELPS Word-studies
5037 té (a conjunction) – “and both” (“both and”). 5037 /té (“and both”) occurs 204 times in the NT and unfortunately is often not translated.
[When translated, 5037 (té) is usually rendered “and,” “both and,” or “and both.”]
πῶς
HOW
How adverb adverb: how 1. in what way or manner; by what means. "how does it work?" 2. used to ask about the condition or quality of something. "how was your vacation?"
3.
used to ask about the extent or degree of something.
“how old are you?”
used to express a strong feeling such as surprise about the extent of something.
“how kind it was of him”
4.
the way in which; that.
“she told us how she had lived out of a suitcase for a week”
in any way in which; however.
“I’ll do business how I like”
πῶς
how
Adv
πῶς
Part of Speech: Adverb; Adverb, Interrogative
Transliteration: pós
Phonetic Spelling: (poce)
Definition: how?
Usage: how, in what manner, by what means.
Interrog. adverb from the same as posos.
n interrogation; how? in what way? — in a direct question, followed by a. the indicative, it is the expression α. of one seeking information and desiring to be taught.
πῶς πληρωθῶσιν αἱ γραφαί, how are the Scriptures (which ought to be fulfilled) to be fulfilled?
πῶς φύγητε, how shall ye (who wish to escape) escape etc.
at all, somehow
Adverb from the base of pou; an interrogative particle of manner; in what way? (sometimes the question is indirect, how?); also as exclamation, how much! – how, after (by) what manner (means), that. (Occasionally unexpressed in English).
see GREEK pou
ποῦ Part of Speech: Adverb, Interrogative Transliteration: pou Phonetic Spelling: (poo) Definition: where? Usage: where, in what place.
πόσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Or Interrogative Pronoun Transliteration: posos Phonetic Spelling: (pos'-os) Definition: how much? how great? Usage: how much, how great, how many.
πῶς
of surprise, intimating that what has been done or is said could not have been done or said, or not rightly done or said — being equivalent to how is it, or how has it come to pass, that etc.
ποσό
HOW MUCH - HOW MANY
τόσο
SO MUCH - SO MANY - SO TALL - SO FAR
Adverb
τόσο • (tóso)
so, such, so much
Ήταν τόσο μακριά που δεν το είδα.
Ítan tóso makriá pou den to eída.
It was so far away that I didn’t see it.
Ήταν ένας τόσο ψηλός με ξανθά μαλλιά.
Ítan énas tóso psilós me xanthá malliá.
He was a guy about so tall with blond hair.
Τόσο μεγάλη βλακεία δεν έχω ακούσει ποτέ μου!
Tóso megáli vlakeía den écho akoúsei poté mou!
I have never heard of such stupidity!
From Ancient Greek τόσον (tóson), neuter form of τόσος (tósos, “so much”).
Determiner
τόσος • (tósos)
so much, so very, so great
Synonym of ὅσος (hósos)
Pronoun
τόσος • (tósos) m demonstrative
so, so much, such
τόσο (tóso, “so much”) (adverb)
τοσοδά (tosodá, “that small, that tiny”)
τοσοδούλης (tosodoúlis, “that small, that tiny”)
τοσούλης (tosoúlis, “that small, that tiny”)
Synonym
ὅσος
as much as, how much?
so much as is enough for
(ὅσος ἄν) how ever great
(ὅσος δή) how great, how ever many
(ὁσοσοῦν) ever so small
(ὅσοσπερ) even so great as, no greater than
(ὅσῳ, ὅσῳ περ) by how much
(when followed by τοσούτῳ) the more.., so much the more..
(ἐν ὅσῳ) while
ὅσος
HOW GREAT — HOW MANY
ὅσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Pronoun Transliteration: hosos Phonetic Spelling: (hos'-os) Definition: how much, how many Usage: how much, how great, how many, as great as, as much.
Πόσο κάνει
HOW DO? - HOW MUCH? (Does it cost?)
Phrase
Πόσο κάνει • (Póso kánei?)
How much?
How much is it?
See also
Πόσο κοστίζει; (Póso kostízei?, “How much does it cost?”)
πόσος
πόση
πόσον
HOW MUCH - HOW GREAT - HOW MANY?
πόσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Or Interrogative Pronoun Transliteration: posos Phonetic Spelling: (pos'-os) Definition: how much? how great? Usage: how much, how great, how many.
ποσα πόσα ποσαι πόσαι ποσας πόσας πόση ποσην πόσην Ποσοι Πόσοι ποσον πόσον Ποσος Πόσος Ποσους Πόσους ποσω πόσω πόσῳ ποσων πόσων
Πόθεν
FROM WHERE? - FROM WHENCE?
Enclitic adverb of origin. (From where does it come?)
Πόθεν
From where
Adv
πόθεν Part of Speech: Adverb, Interrogative Transliteration: pothen Phonetic Spelling: (poth'-en) Definition: from where Usage: whence, from what place.
whence.
From the base of posis with enclitic adverb of origin; from which (as interrogative) or what (as relative) place, state, source or cause – whence.
ὅθεν
HENCE - FROM WHEN - WHENCE
ὅθεν = from where, or from where:
is rendered either as an indicative adverb thence or as a question mark desire
ἀρχῆθεν
ἀρχῆθεν
from old, from the beginning
τοῦ δ᾽ ἱροῦ ὡς ἀρχῆθεν ( το ναό τον άφησαν όπως είναι από παλιά)
from the beginning
foil γὰρ εἶναι ἀρχῆθεν μὴ ἐλθεῖν τὰς γυναῖκας
ποῦ
WHERE - IN WHAT PLACE
pou: where? Original Word: ποῦ Part of Speech: Adverb, Interrogative Transliteration: pou Phonetic Spelling: (poo) Definition: where? Usage: where, in what place.
πότε
ποτέ
WHEN? - AT WHAT TIME? - AT ONE TIME OR ANOTHER
From πόσος (how much, how many) and τέ (both, and)
πότε: when?
Original Word: πότε Part of Speech: Particle, Interrogative Transliteration: pote Phonetic Spelling: (pot'-eh) Definition: when? Usage: when, at what time.
ποτέ
enclitic particle from the same as πόσος and τέ
at one time or other, at some time, formerly.
ποτέ
πόσος
τέ
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
ποτέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: pote
Phonetic Spelling: (pot-eh’)
Definition: once, ever
Usage: at one time or other, at some time, formerly.
enclitic particle from the same as πόσος and τέ
πόσος (how much, how many) and τέ (both, and)
πόσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Or Interrogative Pronoun Transliteration: posos Phonetic Spelling: (pos'-os) Definition: how much? how great? Usage: how much, how great, how many.
how great
From an absolute pos (who, what) and hos; interrogative pronoun (of amount) how much (large, long or (plural) many) – how great (long, many), what.
see GREEK hos
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun
Transliteration: hos, hé, ho
Phonetic Spelling: (hos)
Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Usage: who, which, what, that.
τέ
“and,” “both and,” or “and both.”
te: and (denotes addition or connection)
Original Word: τέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: te
Phonetic Spelling: (teh)
Definition: and (denotes addition or connection)
Usage: and, both.
5037 té (a conjunction) – “and both” (“both and”). 5037 /té (“and both”) occurs 204 times in the NT and unfortunately is often not translated.
[When translated, 5037 (té) is usually rendered “and,” “both and,” or “and both.”]
πόσος
τέ
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
ὅπου
WHERE — IN WHAT PLACE
ὅπου Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: hopou Phonetic Spelling: (hop'-oo) Definition: where Usage: where, whither, in what place.
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
πού Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: pou Phonetic Spelling: (poo) Definition: somewhere Usage: where, somewhere, anywhere; with numerals: somewhere about.
πόσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Or Interrogative Pronoun Transliteration: posos Phonetic Spelling: (pos'-os) Definition: how much? how great? Usage: how much, how great, how many.
ὅτι
“THAT” — BECAUSE OF “THAT” - SINCE “THAT”
TO THE EXTENT “THAT” - TO THE DEGREE “THAT”
This + This + This = That
Original Word: ὅτι Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: hoti Phonetic Spelling: (hot'-ee) Definition: that, because Usage: that, since, because; may introduce direct discourse.
that (pron.)
Old English þæt, “that, so that, after that,” neuter singular demonstrative pronoun (“A Man’s a Man for a’ that”), relative pronoun (“O thou that hearest prayer”), and demonstrative adjective (“Look at that caveman go!”), corresponding to masc. se, fem. seo. From Proto-Germanic *that, from PIE *tod-, extended form of demonstrative pronominal base *-to- (see -th (1)).
With the breakdown of the grammatical gender system, it came to be used in Middle English and Modern English for all genders. Germanic cognates include Old Saxon that, Old Frisian thet, Middle Dutch, Dutch dat “that,” German der, die, das “the.”
Generally more specific or emphatic than the, but in some cases they are interchangeable. From c. 1200 opposed to this as indicating something farther off. In adverbial use (“I’m that old”), in reference to something implied or previously said, c. 1200, an abbreviation of the notion of “to that extent,” “to that degree.” As a conjunction (“Not that I loved Caesar less, but that I loved Rome more”) it was originally the neuter pronoun or adjective that used practically as a definite article qualifying the whole sentence.
Slang that way “in love” first recorded 1929. That-a-way “in that direction” is recorded from 1839. “Take that!” said while delivering a blow, is recorded from early 15c.
The function word “that” is used in the English language for several grammatical purposes.
These include:
as a complementizer/subordinating conjunction—
(“He asked that she go.”)
That can be omitted when used to introduce a subordinate clause—
“he told me that it is a good read” could just as easily be “he told me it is a good read”.
That can be used in subordinate conjunctions describing a person or people when who(m) is problematic—
to introduce a restrictive relative clause—
“The test that she took was hard.”
In this role, that may be analyzed either as a relative pronoun or as a conjunction as in the first case; see English relative clauses:
That as relativizer instead of relative pronoun.
“That” is also used to replace and substitute the word “which” (subject) and “who” (person).
as a demonstrative pronoun. (“That was hard.”) (plural: those)
as a demonstrative adjective. (“That test was hard.”) (plural: those)
as an adverb. (“The test wasn’t that bad.”)
Old English: þæt
In the first two uses the word is usually pronounced weakly, as /ðət/, whereas in the other uses it is pronounced /ðæt/.
In the Old English language that was spelled þæt. It was also abbreviated as a letter Thorn, þ, with the ascender crossed, ( OE thaet.png ).
In Middle English, the letter Ash, æ, was replaced with the letter a, so that that was spelled þat, or sometimes þet.
The ascender of the þ was reduced (making it similar to the Old English letter Wynn, ƿ), which necessitated writing a small t above the letter to abbreviate the word that ( ME that.png ).
In later Middle English and Early Modern English the þ evolved into a y shape, so that the word was spelled yat (although the spelling with a th replacing the þ was starting to become more popular) and the abbreviation for that was a y with a small t above it ( EME that.svg ). This abbreviation can still be seen in reprints of the 1611 edition of the King James Version of the Bible in places such as II Corinthians 13:7.
ὅτι
BECAUSE - SINCE THIS, THEN THAT
ὅτι
because
Conj
ὅτι Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: hoti Phonetic Spelling: (hot'-ee) Definition: that, because Usage: that, since, because; may introduce direct discourse.
the substance or contents (of a statement), that;
ὅτι simply introduces the reason, because
Joined to verbs of thinking, believing, judging, hoping:
οὖν
THEREFORE - NOW THEN - AS A RESULT
This caused that — This came from that — This resulted from that
οὖν
then
Conj
οὖν Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: oun Phonetic Spelling: (oon) Definition: therefore, then, (and) so Usage: therefore, then. HELPS Word-studies 3767 oún (a conjunction) – therefore, now then, accordingly so. 3767 (oún) occurs 526 times in the NT and is typically translated "therefore" which means, "By extension, here's how the dots connect."
ἵνα
SO THAT - IN ORDER THAT (looking to the aim (intended result) of the verbal idea)
Do this so that results
ἵνα
that
Conj
ἵνα Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: hina Phonetic Spelling: (hin'-ah) Definition: in order that, that, so that Usage: in order that, so that.
2443 hína (a subordinating conjunction) – for the purpose that (in order that), looking to the aim (intended result) of the verbal idea. 2443 /hína (“for the purpose that”) is “the semantically marked (dramatic) way of expressing purpose in Greek (as compared for example to the plain infinitive)” (G. Archer).
albeit, because, in order that, lest
Probably from the same as the former part of heautou (through the demonstrative idea; compare ho); in order that (denoting the purpose or the result) – albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as, (so) that, (for) to. Compare hina me.
see GREEK heautou
see GREEK ho
see GREEK hina me
ὁ, ἡ, τό Part of Speech: Definite Article Transliteration: ho, hé, to Phonetic Spelling: (ho) Definition: the Usage: the, the definite article.
ἑαυτοῦ, ῆς, οῦ
Part of Speech: Reflexive Pronoun
Transliteration: heautou
Phonetic Spelling: (heh-ow-too')
Definition: of himself, herself, itself
Usage: himself, herself, itself.
HELPS Word-studies
1438 heautoú (reflexive pronoun of the 3rd person) – 1438 /heautoú ("himself, herself, itself," etc.) is the 3rd person reflexive (singular, plural) form which also functions as the reflexive for 1st and 2nd person (A-S).
ἵνα
FOR THE INTENDED PURPOSE THAT…
conjunction denoting purpose, definition or result
ἵνα
that
Conj
hina: in order that, that, so that
Original Word: ἵνα
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: hina
Phonetic Spelling: (hin'-ah)
Definition: in order that, that, so that
Usage: in order that, so that.
HELPS Word-studies
2443 hína (a subordinating conjunction) – for the purpose that (in order that), looking to the aim (intended result) of the verbal idea. 2443 /hína ("for the purpose that") is "the semantically marked (dramatic) way of expressing purpose in Greek (as compared for example to the plain infinitive)" (G. Archer).
οὕτως
SO - THUS - IN THIS MANNER - IN THIS WAY - AS FOLLOWS
οὕτως
so
Adv
οὕτως Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: houtó and houtós Phonetic Spelling: (hoo'-to) Definition: in this way, thus Usage: thus, so, in this manner.
3779 hoútō (an adverb, derived from the demonstrative pronoun, 3778 /hoútos, “this”) – like this . . .; in this manner, in this way (fashion), in accordance with this description (i.e. corresponding to what follows); in keeping with; along this line, in the manner spoken.
virtue of its native demonstrative force it refers to what precedes; “in the manner spoken of; in the way described; in the way it was done; in this manner; in such a manner; thus, so”:
It takes the place of an explanatory participial clause, equivalent to matters being thus arranged, under these circumstances, in such a condition of things
(i. e. since God had pledged the promise by an oath); equivalent to things having been thus settled, this having been done, then:
in the sense of consequently
it prepares the way for what follows.
thus (adv.)
Old English þus “in this way, as follows,” related to þæt “that” and this; from Proto-Germanic *thus- (source also of Old Saxon and Old Frisian thus, Middle Dutch and Dutch dus), from PIE *to-.
as (adv., conj., pron.)
c. 1200, worn-down form of Old English alswa “quite so, wholly so,” literally “all so” (see also), fully established by c. 1400. Equivalent to so; any distinction in use is purely idiomatic. Related to German als “as, than,” from Middle High German also.
Phrase as well “just as much” is recorded from late 15c.; the phrase also can imply “as well as not,” “as well as anything else.” Phrase as if, in Kantian metaphysics (translating German als ob), introducing a supposition not to be taken literally, is from 1892; as an interjection of incredulity (as if!; i.e. “as if that really could happen”) is attested from 1995. It duplicates Latin quasi. Phrase as it were “as if it were so” is attested from late 14c.
so (adv.)
Old English swa, swæ (adv., conj., pron.) “in this way,” also “to that extent; so as, consequently, therefore,” and purely intensive;
from Proto-Germanic *swa (source also of Old Saxon, Middle Dutch, Old High German so, Old Norse sva, Danish saa, Swedish så, Old Frisian sa, Dutch zo, German so “so,” Gothic swa “as”),
from PIE reflexive pronominal stem *swo- “so”
source also of Greek hos “as,”
Old Latin suad “so,”
Latin se “himself”
derivative of *s(w)e-, pronoun of the third person and reflexive (see idiom).
Old English swa frequently was strengthened by eall, and so also is contained in compounds as, also, such. The -w- was eliminated by contraction from 12c.; compare two, which underwent the same process but retained its spelling.
As a word confirming a previous statement, late Old English; also from late Old English as an intensive in an affirmative clause (such as so very “exceedingly, extremely”).
As an “introductory particle” [OED] from 1590s. Used to add emphasis or contradict a negative from 1913. So in mid-20c. British slang could mean “homosexual” (adj.). So? as a term of dismissal is attested from 1886 (short for is that so?, etc.). So what as an exclamation of indifference dates from 1934. Abbreviating phrase and so on is attested from 1724. So far so good is from 1721.
also (adv., conj.)
Old English eallswa “just as, even as, as if, so as, likewise,” contraction of eal swa, from all “altogether” + so. Originally an emphatic form of so. The sense of “wholly so” weakened to “in addition to, in the same way,” replacing eke. Used in Old English to introduce a sequel to a preceding statement, “and so, then, therefore.” Used from c. 1200 in connecting sentences, “in addition, moreover.” The compound has parallel forms in German also, Dutch alzoo. English as is a shortened form of it.
Early ME has the phrase as well as the compound. The reduced forms alse, als, as gradually become established in certain constructions, the fuller also in others …. The clear distinction between also and as is not attained until the 15th century. [Middle English Compendium, University of Michigan]
για
FOR
Preposition
για
for, to, about, about to, unto
for (prep.)
Old English for “before, in the sight of, in the presence of; as far as; during, before; on account of, for the sake of; in place of, instead of,”
from Proto-Germanic *fur “before; in”
source also of Old Saxon furi “before,”
Old Frisian for, Middle Dutch vore, Dutch voor “for, before;”
German für “for;” Danish for “for,” før “before;”
Gothic faur “for,” faura “before”
from PIE root *per- (1) “forward,” hence “in front of, before,” etc.
From late Old English as “in favor of.”
For and fore differentiated gradually in Middle English.
For alone as a conjunction
“because, since, for the reason that; in order that”
is from late Old English, probably a shortening of common Old English phrases such as for þon þy “therefore,”
literally “for the (reason) that.”
————————————————————-
for
saying who or what something relates to, or who benefits
- PREPOSITION
If something is for someone, they are intended to have it or benefit from it.
Isn’t that enough for you?
…a table for two.
He wanted all the running of the business for himself.
Synonyms: intended, appropriate to, designed to meet the needs of More Synonyms of for - PREPOSITION
If you work or do a job for someone, you are employed by them.
I knew he worked for a security firm.
Have you had any experience writing for radio? - PREPOSITION
If you speak or act for a particular group or organization, you represent them.
She appears nightly on the television news, speaking for the State Department.
Synonyms: on behalf of, representing More Synonyms of for - PREPOSITION
If someone does something for you, they do it so that you do not have to do it.
If your pharmacy doesn’t stock the product you want, have them order it for you.
I hold a door open for an old person. - PREPOSITION [adj/n PREP]
If you feel a particular emotion for someone, you feel it on their behalf.
This is the best thing you’ve ever done – I am so happy for you! - PREPOSITION [adj/n PREP]
If you feel a particular emotion for someone or something, they are the object of that emotion, and you feel it when you think about them.
John, I’m sorry for Steve, but I think you’ve made the right decisions. - PREPOSITION
You use for after words such as ‘time,’ ‘space,’ ‘money,’ or ‘energy’ when you say how much there is or whether there is enough of it in order to be able to do or use a particular thing.
Many new trains have space for wheelchair users.
…a huge room with plenty of room for books. - PREPOSITION
You use for when you make a statement about something in order to say how it affects or relates to someone, or what their attitude to it is.
What matters for most scientists is money and facilities.
For her, books were as necessary to life as bread. - PREPOSITION [PREP n to-inf]
After some adjective, noun, and verb phrases, you use for to introduce the subject of the action indicated by the following infinitive verb.
It might be possible for a single woman to be accepted as a foster parent.
I had made arrangements for my affairs to be dealt with by one of my children. - PREPOSITION [with neg]
If you say that something is not for you, you mean that you do not enjoy it or that it is not suitable for you.
[informal]
Wendy decided the sport was not for her. - PREPOSITION [PREP n to-inf]
If it is for you to do something, it is your responsibility or right to do it.
I wish you would come back to Washington with us, but that’s for you to decide. - PREPOSITION
For is the preposition that is used after some nouns, adjectives, or verbs in order to introduce more information or to indicate what a quality, thing, or action relates to.
Reduced-calorie cheese is a great substitute for cream cheese.
Parking lot owners should be legally responsible for protecting vehicles. - PREPOSITION
If a word or expression has the same meaning as another word or expression, you can say that the first one is another word or expression for the second one.
The technical term for sunburn is erythema. - PREPOSITION
To be named for someone means to be given the same name as them.
[US]
The Brady Bill is named for former White House Press Secretary James Brady. - PREPOSITION
You use for in a piece of writing when you mention information which will be found somewhere else.
For further information on the life of William James Sidis, see Amy Wallace, “The Prodigy.” - PREPOSITION
For is used in conditional sentences, in expressions such as ‘if not for’ and ‘were it not for,’ to introduce the only thing which prevents the main part of the sentence from being true.
If not for John, Brian wouldn’t have learned the truth.
The earth would be a frozen ball if it were not for the radiant heat of the sun.
Ἐὰν (from ἢ + ὰν)
Εἰ
Latin: sī
IF POSSIBLY
from εἰ (if, forasmuch as) and ἄν (possibility, conditionality)
Ἐὰν
If
Conj
Εἰ
If
Conj
ἐάν Part of Speech: Conditional Particle Or Conjunction Transliteration: ean Phonetic Spelling: (eh-an') Definition: if Usage: if
(a conjunction, derived from 1487 /ei, “if” and 302 /án, a particle showing a statement is conditional) – if, referring to a condition extending to its “spin-off” possibilities – i.e. that happen if the condition is actualized or is valid.
from εἰ (if, forasmuch as) and ἄν (possibility)
εἰ
ei: forasmuch as, if, that
Original Word: εἰ Part of Speech: Conditional Particle Or Conjunction Transliteration: ei Phonetic Spelling: (i) Definition: forasmuch as, if, that Usage: if.
Conjunction
εἰ • (ei)
if
Compare Latin: sī
Conjunction
sī
if, supposing that
Sī versūs hōrum duōrum poētārum neglegētis, magnā parte litterārum carēbitis.
If you neglect the verses of these two poets, you will miss a great part of literature.
whether (when a verb of seeing or trying is the main verb in the apodosis; or when sī is used twice correlatively)
sī… sī ― whether… or
sīc (“so, thus”) sīcut (“as”) sīs (“if you will”) sīve / seu (“disjunctive sī”) sōdēs (“if you will”) ac sī (“just as if”) nisi (“unless”) quasi (“as if, like”) sī(n) aliter (“if otherwise”) sī dīs placet (“expr. of indignant surprise”) sīcubi (“if anywhere”) sīcunde (“if from anywhere”) sīn (“if however”) sī mē amās (“please”) sī minus (“if not”) sī modo (“provided that”) sī nōn (“if not”) sī̆ quandō (“if ever”) sī̆ quidem (“if/since indeed”) sī quis / sī quid (“if anybody/anything”) sī vīs (“if you like”) sī vīvō (“as sure as I'm alive”) sī nōndum (“if not yet”)
——————————————————————
ἄν
an: usually untranslatable, but generally denoting supposition, wish, possibility or uncertainty
Original Word: ἄν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: an
Phonetic Spelling: (an)
Definition: usually untranslatable, but generally denoting supposition, wish, possibility or uncertainty
Usage: an untranslatable word (under the circumstances, in that case, anyhow), the general effect of which is to make a statement contingent, which would otherwise be definite: it is thus regularly used with the subjunctive mood.
HELPS Word-studies
302 án – a conditional particle expressing possibility, based on a preexisting condition (stipulation, prerequisite). This adds an important theoretical (hypothetical) sense to a statement which narrows down the sense of that statement.
302 (an) “indicates what can (could) occur – but only on certain conditions, or by the combination of certain fortuitous causes” (J. Thayer). Only the context determines how 302 (án) “limits” (“conditions”) the statement by the possibility (condition) involved. Accordingly, 302 (án) is often called the “untranslatable particle.” However, it always influences (“conditions”) its sentence and is key to properly understanding the verse (passage) in which it occurs.
[Though 302 (án) is not easily “translatable,” it always conveys important meaning. (The KJV sometimes translates an as “perchance,” “haply.”)
302 (an) is used about 300 times in the NT, introducing statements that have conditional or hypothetical meaning.]
ἢ
OR - THAN
ἢ
than
Conj
Not to be confused with…
ᾖ
it is
V-PSA-3S
é: or, than Original Word: ἤ Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle Transliteration: é Phonetic Spelling: (ay) Definition: or, than Usage: or, than.
Used as a Conjunction
than
Used in comparisons, to introduce the basis of comparison.
she’s taller than I am; she found his advice more witty than helpful; we have less work today than we had yesterday; We had no choice than to return home
(obsolete outside dialects, usually used with for) Because; for.
Used as a Preposition
than
introduces a comparison, and is associated with comparatives, and with words such as more, less, and fewer. Typically, it seeks to measure the force of an adjective or similar description between two predicates.
Patients diagnosed more recently are probably surviving an average of longer than two years.
A player than whom none is more skillful.
————————————————————————————————-
————————————————————————————————-
PREPOSITIONAL PREFIXES
PREPOSITIONAL PREFIXES
Ἐν
ἐν
IN
(but, in the meantime, however, in the meantime)
Ἐν
But in
Prep
ἐν Part of Speech: Preposition Transliteration: en Phonetic Spelling: (en) Definition: in, on, at, by, with Usage: in, on, among. HELPS Word-studies 1722 en (a preposition) – properly, in (inside, within); (figuratively) "in the realm (sphere) of," as in the condition (state) in which something operates from the inside (within).
ἐπί
UPON - ON TOP OF - OVER
ἐπί
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: epi
Phonetic Spelling: (ep-ee')
Definition: on, upon
Usage: on, to, against, on the basis of, at.
HELPS Word-studies
1909 epí (a preposition) – properly, on (upon), implying what "fits" given the "apt contact," building on the verbal idea. 1909 /epí ("upon") naturally looks to the response (effect) that goes with the envisioned contact, i.e. its apt result ("spin-offs," effects). The precise nuance of 1909 (epí) is only determined by the context, and by the grammatical case following it – i.e. genitive, dative, or accusative case.
ἐκ, ἐξ
EX - OUT FROM
ἐκ, ἐξ
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: ek or ex
Phonetic Spelling: (ek)
Definition: from, from out of
Usage: from out, out from among, from, suggesting from the interior outwards.
HELPS Word-studies
1537 ek (a preposition, written eks before a vowel) – properly, "out from and to" (the outcome); out from within. 1537 /ek ("out of") is one of the most under-translated (and therefore mis-translated) Greek propositions – often being confined to the meaning "by." 1537 (ek) has a two-layered meaning ("out from and to") which makes it out-come oriented (out of the depths of the source and extending to its impact on the object).
προς
TO - TOWARD
Particle
να
to
προς
to, towards, on, toward, concerning, unto
ὑπέρ
HYPER - ABOVE - OVER AND BEYOND
ὑπέρ Part of Speech: Preposition Transliteration: huper Phonetic Spelling: (hoop-er') Definition: over, beyond, on behalf of, for the sake of, concerning Usage: gen: in behalf of; acc: above.
5228 hypér (a preposition) – properly, beyond (above); (figuratively) to extend benefit (help) that reaches beyond the present situation.
5228 /hypér (“beyond”) is usually best translated “for the betterment (advantage) of,” i.e. focusing on benefit. M. Vincent, “5228 (hypér) signifies something like ‘in the interests of the truth . . . concerning.’ J. B. Lightfoot (on Gal 1:4) . . . remarks that hypér has ‘a sense of interest in,’ which is wanting to peri” (WS).
[5228 (hypér) naturally expresses conferring benefit, i.e. for the sake of “betterment” (improvement, extending benefit).]
ῠ̔πο
HYPO - UNDER - SUB
ῠ̔πο- • (hupo-) under, sub-, hypo- of the casing or covering of the agency or influence (by) denoting a small degree, gradual
δἰ
διά
Διὰ
BECAUSE OF - THROUGH - ON ACCOUNT OF
Διὰ
Because of
Prep
dia: through, on account of, because of
διά (“written δἰ before a vowel, except in proper names)
through, throughout, by the instrumentality of
properly, after verbs denoting an extension, or a motion, or an act, that occurs through any place:
Original Word: διά
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: dia
Phonetic Spelling: (dee-ah’)
Definition: through, on account of, because of
Usage: (a) gen: through, throughout, by the instrumentality of, (b) acc: through, on account of, by reason of, for the sake of, because of.
1223 diá (a preposition) – properly, across (to the other side), back-and-forth to go all the way through, “successfully across” (“thoroughly”). 1223 (diá) is also commonly used as a prefix and lend the same idea (“thoroughly,” literally, “successfully” across to the other side).
[1223 (diá) is a root of the English term diameter (“across to the other side, through”). Before a vowel, dia is simply written di̓.]
εις
Not to be confused with εἷς
IN - INTO - UNTO - TO - TOWARD
εἰς
as
Prep
- οὖτος ἦλθεν εἰς μαρτυρίαν, ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ περὶ τοῦ φωτός, ἵνα πάντες πιστεύσωσιν δι᾽ αὐτοῦ.
7 The same3778 came2064 for1519 a witness,3141 to2443 bear witness3140 of4012 the3588 Light,5457 that2443 all3956 men through1223 him846 might believe.4100
εἰς
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: eis
Phonetic Spelling: (ice)
Definition: to or into (indicating the point reached or entered, of place, time, purpose, result)
Usage: into, in, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among.
1519 eis (a preposition) – properly, into (unto) – literally, “motion into which” implying penetration (“unto,” “union”) to a particular purpose or result.
εις
in, to, at, into, unto, for
from Proto-Indo-European *h₁én (“in”)
from which also ἐν (en, “in, at, on”).
Preposition
εἰς • (eis) (governs the accusative)
into
εἰς
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: eis
Phonetic Spelling: (ice)
Definition: to or into (indicating the point reached or entered, of place, time, purpose, result)
Usage: into, in, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among.
1519 eis (a preposition) – properly, into (unto) – literally, “motion into which” implying penetration (“unto,” “union”) to a particular purpose or result.
εἰς, a preposition governing the accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, toward, for, among. It is used:
A. Properly
I. of place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc.;
- of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and a. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden.
of motion (not into a place itself, but) into the vicinity of a place; where it may be rendered to, near, toward.
direct one’s remarks to or toward.
————————————————————
Adverb
εἰς ὄνῠχᾰ • (eis ónukha)
ad unguem
“To the nail”
Literally “to a nail”: an expression borrowed from sculptors, who, in modelling, give the finishing touch with the fingernail, or from joiners, who test the accuracy of joints in wood by the fingernail.
———————————————————————
NOT TO BE CONFUSED WITH
εἷς, μία, ἕν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: heis Phonetic Spelling: (hice) Definition: one Usage: one.
———————————————————————-
Matthew 2:1 Prep
GRK: ἀνατολῶν παρεγένοντο εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα
KJV: from the east to Jerusalem,
INT: east arrived at Jerusalem
Matthew 2:8 Prep
GRK: πέμψας αὐτοὺς εἰς Βηθλεὲμ εἶπεν
KJV: he sent them to Bethlehem, and said,
INT: having sent them to Bethlehem he said
Matthew 2:11 Prep
GRK: καὶ ἐλθόντες εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν
KJV: when they were come into the house,
INT: And having come into the house
Matthew 2:12 Prep
GRK: ὁδοῦ ἀνεχώρησαν εἰς τὴν χώραν
KJV: they departed into their own
INT: route they withdrew into the country
Matthew 2:13 Prep
GRK: καὶ φεῦγε εἰς Αἴγυπτον καὶ
KJV: and flee into Egypt, and
INT: and flee into Egypt and
Matthew 2:14 Prep
GRK: καὶ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς Αἴγυπτον
KJV: and departed into Egypt:
INT: and withdrew into Egypt
Matthew 2:20 Prep
GRK: καὶ πορεύου εἰς γῆν Ἰσραήλ
KJV: and go into the land of Israel:
INT: and go into [the] land of Israel
Matthew 2:21 Prep
GRK: καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς γῆν Ἰσραήλ
KJV: and came into the land of Israel.
INT: and came into [the] land of Israel
Matthew 2:22 Prep
GRK: ὄναρ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὰ μέρη
KJV: he turned aside into the parts
INT: a dream he withdrew into the district
Matthew 2:23 Prep
GRK: ἐλθὼν κατῴκησεν εἰς πόλιν λεγομένην
KJV: he came and dwelt in a city called
INT: having come he dwelt in a city called
Matthew 3:10 Prep
GRK: ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται
KJV: and cast into the fire.
INT: is cut down and into [the] fire is thrown
Matthew 3:11 Prep
GRK: ἐν ὕδατι εἰς μετάνοιαν ὁ
KJV: with water unto repentance: but
INT: with water to repentance
Matthew 3:12 Prep
GRK: σῖτον αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην
KJV: his wheat into the garner; but
INT: wheat of him into the barn
Matthew 4:1 Prep
GRK: Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη εἰς τὴν ἔρημον
KJV: the Spirit into the wilderness
INT: Jesus was led up into the wilderness
Matthew 4:5 Prep
GRK: ὁ διάβολος εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν
KJV: him up into the holy city,
INT: the devil to the holy
Matthew 4:8 Prep
GRK: ὁ διάβολος εἰς ὄρος ὑψηλὸν
KJV: him up into an exceeding high
INT: the devil to a mountain high
Matthew 4:12 Prep
GRK: παρεδόθη ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν
KJV: he departed into Galilee;
INT: had been arrested he withdrew into Galilee
Matthew 4:13 Prep
GRK: ἐλθὼν κατῴκησεν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ τὴν
KJV: he came and dwelt in Capernaum, which
INT: having come he dwelt at Capernaum which
Matthew 4:18 Prep
GRK: βάλλοντας ἀμφίβληστρον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν
KJV: casting a net into the sea: for
INT: casting a large net into the sea
Matthew 4:24 Prep GRK: ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν NAS: about Him spread throughout all KJV: fame went throughout all Syria: INT: news of him into all
Matthew 5:1 Prep
GRK: ὄχλους ἀνέβη εἰς τὸ ὄρος
KJV: he went up into a mountain:
INT: crowds he went up on the mountain
Matthew 5:13 Prep
GRK: τίνι ἁλισθήσεται εἰς οὐδὲν ἰσχύει
KJV: good for nothing,
INT: what will it be salted for nothing it is potent
Matthew 5:20 Prep
GRK: μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν
KJV: enter into the kingdom
INT: not shall you enter into the kingdom
Matthew 5:22 Prep
GRK: ἔνοχος ἔσται εἰς τὴν γέενναν
KJV: shall be in danger of hell fire.
INT: liable will be to the hell
Matthew 5:25 Prep
GRK: ὑπηρέτῃ καὶ εἰς φυλακὴν βληθήσῃ
KJV: and thou be cast into prison.
INT: officer and into prison you be cast
πᾶς
πᾶσα
πᾶν
ALL - EVERY - ON ALL SIDES - TOTALITY
πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: pas Phonetic Spelling: (pas) Definition: all, every Usage: all, the whole, every kind of. HELPS Word-studies 3956 pás – each, every; each "part(s) of a totality" (L & N, 1, 59.24).
3956 /pás (“each, every”) means “all” in the sense of “each (every) part that applies.” The emphasis of the total picture then is on “one piece at a time.” 365 (ananeóō) then focuses on the part(s) making up the whole – viewing the whole in terms of the individual parts.
[When 3956 (pás) modifies a word with the definite article it has “extensive-intensive” force – and is straightforward intensive when the Greek definite article is lacking.]
πάντα
ALL THINGS
πάντα
all things
Adj-ANP
pas: all, every
Original Word: πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν
Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: pas Phonetic Spelling: (pas) Definition: all, every Usage: all, the whole, every kind of.
3956 pás – each, every; each “part(s) of a totality” (L & N, 1, 59.24).
3956 /pás (“each, every”) means “all” in the sense of “each (every) part that applies.” The emphasis of the total picture then is on “one piece at a time.” 365 (ananeóō) then focuses on the part(s) making up the whole – viewing the whole in terms of the individual parts.
[When 3956 (pás) modifies a word with the definite article it has “extensive-intensive” force – and is straightforward intensive when the Greek definite article is lacking.]
παρά
ALONGSIDE - COUNTER - BY THE SIDE OF
παρά
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: para
Phonetic Spelling: (par-ah’)
Definition: from beside, by the side of, by, beside
Usage: gen: from; dat: beside, in the presence of; acc: alongside of.
3844 pará (a preposition) – properly, close beside. 3844 /pará (“from closely alongside”) introduces someone (something) as very “close beside.”
3844 (pará) an emphatic “from,” means “from close beside” (“alongside”). It stresses nearness (closeness) which is often not conveyed in translation. 3844 (pará) is typically theologically significant, even when used as a prefix (i.e. in composition). 3844 (pará) usually adds the overtone, “from close beside” (implying intimate participation) and can be followed by the genitive, dative, or accusative case – each one conveying a distinct nuance.
παρά
παρ’
BESIDES - FROM - ALONG SIDE
para: from beside, by the side of, by, beside
Original Word: παρά
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: para
Phonetic Spelling: (par-ah’)
Definition: from beside, by the side of, by, beside
Usage: gen: from; dat: beside, in the presence of; acc: alongside of.
HELPS Word-studies
3844 pará (a preposition) – properly, close beside. 3844 /pará (“from closely alongside”) introduces someone (something) as very “close beside.”
3844 (pará) an emphatic “from,” means “from close beside” (“alongside”). It stresses nearness (closeness) which is often not conveyed in translation. 3844 (pará) is typically theologically significant, even when used as a prefix (i.e. in composition). 3844 (pará) usually adds the overtone, “from close beside” (implying intimate participation) and can be followed by the genitive, dative, or accusative case – each one conveying a distinct nuance.
πέρα περάω πέραν πέρας πέρνημι πέρᾱμᾰ πιπράσκω
BEYOND - OVER THERE - ON THE OTHER SIDE - CROSS OVER
Adverb
πέρα • (péra)
beyond
πέραν
on the other side
Prep
beyond
at a point farther away from the speaker
go somewhere beyond if you want to smoke to avoid our ntoumaniaseis
at a point in time after the time indicated, after
εκεί πέρα (ekeí péra, “over there”)
εδώ πέρα (edó péra, “1. here; 2. in that case”)
κάνω πέρα (káno péra, “1. step aside; 2. oust, distance”)
πέρα από κάθε (péra apó káthe, “beyond”)
πέρα βρέχει (péra vréchei) who cares? - it’s raining beyond
πέρα-δώθε (péra-dóthe, “back and forth”)
πέρα για πέρα (péra gia péra, “totally, absolutely”)
πέρα ως πέρα (péra os péra, “totally, absolutely”)
τα βγάζω πέρα (ta vgázo péra, “I manage”)
τα φέρνω πέρα (ta férno péra, “I manage”)
περᾰ́ω • (peráō)
to go from one side to another
to pass through over or traverse, cross, esp. over water
(intransitive) to penetrate or pierce (of a pointed weapon)
πιπράσκω • (pipráskō)
to sell, esp. for exportation
(perfect passive, πέπραμαι) to be betrayed, ruined, undone
Shortened from πιπεράσκω (piperáskō), reduplicated form of περάω (peráō, “to export for sale”).
———————————————————————-
πέρᾱμᾰ • (pérāma) n (genitive πέρᾱμᾰτος); third declension
a ferry
From περάω (“to cross, traverse”) + -μα (instance noun).
———————————————————————-
πέρνημι • (pérnēmi)
to sell
Related terms
πόρνη (pórnē)
From Proto-Indo-European *per- (“to sell”); cognate with Latin pars and portiō.
————————————————————————
EXPRESSIONS
Expressions [edit] - Εκφράσεις[επεξεργασία = edit] I do over : I retreat , I walk away ( someone or something ) I remove back and forth beyond apart from after by beyond : very much from one end to the other I manage: I manage (especially financially) (quantity of something) per day, the doctor makes it (/ do) over : an expression used to emphasize the value of an object, situation or energy, often ironically an apple a day, the doctor makes it over ten bends a day, the doctor does it over
Εκφράσεις[επεξεργασία]
κάνω πέρα:
υποχωρώ, απομακρύνομαι
(κάποιον ή κάτι)απομακρύνω
πέρα-δώθε
πέρα από
εκτός από
μετά από
πέρα για πέρα:
πάρα πολύ
από τη μία άκρη μέχρι την άλλη
τα βγάζω πέρα: τα καταφέρνω (ιδιαίτερα για οικονομικά)
(ποσότητα από κάτι) την ημέρα, το γιατρό τον κάνει(/κάνουν) πέρα: έκφραση που χρησιμοποιείται για να δώσει έμφαση στην αξία κάποιου αντικειμένου, κατάστασης ή ενέργειας, πολλές φορές και ειρωνικά
ένα μήλο την ημέρα, το γιατρό τον κάνει πέρα
δέκα κάμψεις την ημέρα, το γιατρό τον κάνουν πέρα
κάνω πέρα - I do over
υποχωρώ, απομακρύνομαι - i retreat, I walk away
(κάποιον ή κάτι)απομακρύνω - i remove
πέρα-δώθε - back and forth
——————————————————————
πέρας, ατος, τό Part of Speech: Noun, Neuter Transliteration: peras Phonetic Spelling: (per'-as) Definition: a limit Usage: (a) a boundary, limit, extremity, (b) an end, conclusion.
πέρας, πέρατος, τό (πέρα beyond), from Aeschylus down, extremity, bound, end (see τέλος, 1 a. at the beginning);
a. of a portion of space (“boundary, frontier): πέρατα τῆς γῆς (the ends of the earth), equivalent to the remotest lands,
——————————————————————
πέραν Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: peran Phonetic Spelling: (per'-an) Definition: on the other side Usage: over, on the other side, beyond.
kin to pera (on the further side)
περί
PERIMETER - AROUND - ABOUT - ENCOMPASS
CIRCA - CIRCUMSCRIBE - CIRCUMFERENCE
περί
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: peri
Phonetic Spelling: (per-ee’)
Definition: about, concerning, around (denotes place, cause or subject)
Usage: (a) gen: about, concerning, (b) acc: around.
HELPS Word-studies
4012 perí (a preposition) – properly, all-around (on every side); encompassing, used of full (comprehensive) consideration where “all the bases are covered” (inclusively). 4012 (perí) is often translated “concerning” (“all about”).
[4012 /perí is the root of the English term, “perimeter.”]
Indicating that the person or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated is as it were encompassed by this act or state; Latincircum, circa; around, about.
with the GENITIVE it denotes that around which an act or state revolves; about, concerning, as touching, etc.
περῐ́
δῐᾰ́
PER - PERI
The English prefix per-, which means “through,” appears in hundreds of English vocabulary words, such as perish and person. You can remember that the prefix per- means “through” via the word permanent, for something that is permanent stays intact “through” the years.
Preposition δῐᾰ́ • (diá) (governs the genitive and accusative) (+ genitive) (of a place) in a line through in the midst of, between along at intervals of, at every (time) between after every (interval of time) (causality) through, by (attested from 1st century B.C.E.) out of (materials from which something is made) (+ accusative) (of a place, poetic) through, among (time) during (causality) thanks to, by aid of because of for the sake of
————————————————————
Prefix
per-
(non-productive) In verbs: denoting the sense “through”, as in perforate.
(non-productive) In verbs: denoting the sense “thoroughly”, as in perfect.
(non-productive) In verbs: denoting the sense “to destruction”, as in pervert.
(non-productive) In adjectives and adverbs: denoting the sense “extremely”, as in perfervid.
(chemistry) Forming nouns and adjectives denoting the maximum proportion of one element in a compound, as in peroxide.
(chemistry) Added to the name of an element in a polyatomic ion to denote the number of atoms of that element (usually four).
Latin
Etymology
From Proto-Italic *peri-. Related to per (“through”).
Prefix
per-
Used to make adjectives or verbs that are “very” something.
magnus (“great, large”) → permagnus (“very great, very large”)
multī (“many”) → permultī (“very many”)
Used to form verbs that are intensive or completive, conveying the idea of doing something all the way through or entirely.
Preposition περῐ́ • (perí) (governs the genitive, dative and accusative) (+ genitive) about, concerning, because of (+ dative) around, for, about (+ accusative) around (both in the circular sense and close proximity sense), near, about
ἀνά
UPWARD - BACKWARD - AGAIN
ἀνά
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: ana
Phonetic Spelling: (an-ah’)
Definition: as a preposition denotes upwards, up, as a prefix denotes up, again, back
Usage: prep. Rare in NT; prop: upwards, up; among, between; in turn; apiece, by; as a prefix: up, to, anew, back.
μέχρι
UNTIL
μέχρι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: mechri or mechris Phonetic Spelling: (mekh'-ree) Definition: as far as, until Usage: as far as, until, even to.
till, until. Or mechris (mekh-ris'); from mekos; as far as, i.e. Up to a certain point (as a preposition, of extent (denoting the terminus, whereas achri refers especially to the space of time or place intervening) or conjunction) -- till, (un-)to, until.
see GREEK μῆκος
see GREEK achri
μῆκος, ους, τό Part of Speech: Noun, Neuter Transliteration: mékos Phonetic Spelling: (may'-kos) Definition: length Usage: length.
from same as μακρός
μακρός, ά, όν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: makros Phonetic Spelling: (mak-ros') Definition: long, far distant Usage: long, distant, far; of long duration.
far, long.
From μῆκος; long (in place (distant) or time (neuter plural)) – far, long.
see GREEK mekos
μέχρι
until, to, unto
Preposition until Up to the time of (something happening). If you can wait until after my meeting with her, we'll talk then. Before (a time). (obsolete) To; physically towards.
equivalent to un- (“against; toward; up to”) + till.
Preposition (“till”) Until; to, up to; as late as (a given time). She stayed till the very end. It's twenty till two. (1:40) I have to work till eight o'clock tonight. (obsolete) To, up to (physically). They led him till his tent (dialectal) To make it possible that.
from Northern Old English: til
Preposition
(“til”)
(with genitive) to, towards
Preposition μέχρι • (mékhri) (governs the genitive) Marker of spatial extension: as far as Marker of temporal extension: until Marker of general extent: to the point of, so far as
———————————————————————- Prefix un- (added to adjectives or past participles) not unannounced (“not being announced”) uneducated (“not educated”) unattractive (“not attractive”) unconstitutional (“not constitutional”)
(added to nouns) absent; lacking; not; negative
ungrace (“lack of grace, gracelessness”)
unrest (“a lack of rest [peace]; war”, noun)
unhope (“despair”)
unfriend (“enemy”)
unrepair
unluck (“misfortune”)
unnova
uncertainty (“lack or absence of certainty”)
unconformity (“a lack or absence of conformity”)
(added to nouns) contrary to or contrasted against traditional norms; unconventional; alternative
unconference
unmethod
Old English: -un
Prefix
un-
negation or absence of: un-, non- (added to nouns and adjectives)
un- + fæġer (“beautiful”) → unfæġer (“ugly”)
un- + dēadlīċ (“mortal”) → undēadlīċ (“immortal”)
un- + dēop (“deep”) → undēop (“shallow”)
un- + dīere (“expensive”) → undīere (“cheap”)
un- + druncen (“drunk”) → undruncen (“sober”)
un- + ġewǣpnod (“armed”) → unġewǣpnod (“unarmed”)
un- + sċyldiġ (“guilty”) → unsċyldiġ (“innocent”)
un- + rīpe (“mature”) → unrīpe (“immature”)
bad (added to nouns to denote a pejorative sense; compare mis-, mal-)
un- + dǣd (“action”) → undǣd (“crime”)
un- + ġelimp (“event”) → unġelimp (“accident”)
un- + hlīsa (“fame”) → unhlīsa (“infamy”)
un- + lǣċe (“doctor”) → unlǣċe (“bad doctor”)
un- + lyft (“air”) → unlyft (“malaria,” lit. “bad air”)
un- + mann (“person”) → unmann (“thug”)
un- + rǣd (“advice”) → unrǣd (“bad advice”)
un- + stenċ (“smell”) → unstenċ (“stench”)
un- + swefn (“dream”) → unswefn (“bad dream”)
un- + tīma (“time”) → untīma (“wrong time”)
un- + weder (“weather”) → unweder (“bad weather”)
un- + þēaw (“habit”) → unþēaw (“vice”)
Prefix
un-
forms verbs from verbs, with an opposite or reversive sense
Old High German: -un
Prefix
un-
un-; prefix of negation, absence or contrariness.
ᾰ̓νᾰ́
UPON
Preposition
ᾰ̓νᾰ́ • (aná) (governs the genitive, dative and accusative)
(+ genitive) (rare) on board
(+ dative) (of location) on, upon
(+ accusative)
up, upwards, along
in sequence, each, throughout
up to
(of amounts) at a rate, speed, or price of, for
(of time) translatable with an adverbial noun phrase
ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν ― anà pâsan hēméran ― every day
ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος ― anà pân étos ― every year
ᾰ̓́νω
UPWARD - INLAND
ᾰ̓́νω (ánō) + -θεν (-then) (with verbs of motion) upwards above, high up (of motion) inland, away from the coast Antonyms (most senses): κᾰ́τω (kátō) Related to ἀνά (aná)
μετά
WITH - AMONG - AFTER
μετά
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: meta
Phonetic Spelling: (met-ah')
Definition: with, among, after
Usage: (a) gen: with, in company with, (b) acc: (1) behind, beyond, after, of place, (2) after, of time, with nouns, neut. of adjectives.
HELPS Word-studies
3326 metá (a preposition) – properly, with ("after with"), implying "change afterward" (i.e. what results after the activity). As an active "with," 3326 (metá) looks towards the after-effect (change, result) which is only defined by the context.
[3326 (metá) before a vowel is written met (meth).]
ἀπο-
AWAY FROM - OUT FROM
Prefix
ἀπο- • (apo-)
Indicating movement: away, from, off
ἀποβαίνω (apobaínō, “step off”)
Indicating breaking one part from another: un-, asunder, apart, off
ἀποτέμνω (apotémnō, “cut off”)
Indicating ending or finishing, or almost like the negative ἀ- (a-, “not”), especially in adjectives
ἀπαλγέω (apalgéō, “put away sorrow for”), ἀπόσῑτος (apósītos, “having eaten nothing”)
back, again
ἀποδίδωμι (apodídōmi, “give back”)
Simply emphasizing the meaning of the verb
because of, owing to
ἀπ- (ap-) – before a vowel without rough breathing
ἀφ- (aph-) – before a vowel with rough breathing
See also: ΑΠΟ, από, ἀπό, ἄπο, απο-, από- and Α.Π.Ο.
————————————————————————————————-
————————————————————————————————-
ἃ
WHICH
ἃ
which
RelPro-ANP
ᾗ
Not to be confused with: ἡ (“the” - Article-NFS)
Not to be confused with: ἤ (“or, than” - Conjunction)
Not to be confused with: ᾖ (“which” - RelPro-DFS)
Not to be confused with: ᾖ (“should be” - V-PSA-3S)
WHICH - OR - THAN
to distinguish things or thoughts which either mutually exclude each other
ᾗ
which
RelPro-DFS
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
——————————————————————-
NOT TO BE CONFUSED WITH
ἤ Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle Transliteration: é Phonetic Spelling: (ay) Definition: or, than Usage: or, than.
- to distinguish things or thoughts which either mutually exclude each other, or one of which can take the place of the other: or (Latinaut,vel);
a. to distinguish one thing from another in words of the same construction: Matthew 5:17 (τόν νόμον ἤ τούς προφήτας), Matthew 5:36 (λευκήν ἤ μέλαιναν)
Conjunction
ἤ • (ḗ)
or
than, as (in a comparative construction)
—————————————————————
NOT TO BE CONFUSED WITH
ᾖ
should be
V-PSA-3S
From εἰμί “I am”
Correlates to the (subjunctive suffix -ῇ )
γεννηθῇ
to be born
V-ASP-3S
εἰμί Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: eimi Phonetic Spelling: (i-mee') Definition: I exist, I am Usage: I am, exist. HELPS Word-studies 1510 eimí (the basic Greek verb which expresses being, i.e. "to be") – am, is. 1510 (eimí), and its counterparts, (properly) convey "straight-forward" being (existence, i.e. without explicit limits).
1510 /eimí (“is, am”) – in the present tense, indicative mood – can be time-inclusive (“omnitemporal,” like the Hebrew imperfect tense). Only the context indicates whether the present tense also has “timeless” implications. For example, 1510 (eimí) is aptly used in Christ’s great “I am” (ego eimi . . . ) that also include His eternality (self-existent life) as our life, bread, light,” etc. See Jn 7:34, 8:58, etc.
Example: Jn 14:6: “I am (1510 /eimí) the way, the truth and the life.” Here 1510 (eimí) naturally accords with the fact Christ is eternal – maning “I am (was, will be).” The “I am formula (Gk egō eimi)” harks back to God’s only name, “Yahweh” (OT/3068, “the lord”) – meaning “He who always was, is, and will be.” Compare Jn 8:58 with Ex 3:14. See also Rev 4:8 and 2962 /kýrios (“Lord”).
ἔσῃ (esē) — 8 Occurrences
Luke 1:20 V-FI-2S
GRK: καὶ ἰδοὺ ἔσῃ σιωπῶν καὶ
INT: and Behold you will be silent and
Luke 5:10 V-FI-2S
GRK: νῦν ἀνθρώπους ἔσῃ ζωγρῶν
INT: now on men you will be catching
Luke 14:14 V-FI-2S
GRK: καὶ μακάριος ἔσῃ ὅτι οὐκ
INT: and blessed you will be for not
Luke 23:43 V-FI-2S
GRK: μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἔσῃ ἐν τῷ
INT: with me you will be in
Acts 13:11 V-FI-2S
GRK: σέ καὶ ἔσῃ τυφλὸς μὴ
INT: you and you will be blind not
Acts 22:15 V-FI-2S
GRK: ὅτι ἔσῃ μάρτυς αὐτῷ
INT: for you will be a witness for him
Ephesians 6:3 V-FI-2S
GRK: γένηται καὶ ἔσῃ μακροχρόνιος ἐπὶ
INT: it might be and you may be long-lived on
1 Timothy 4:6 V-FI-2S
GRK: ἀδελφοῖς καλὸς ἔσῃ διάκονος Χριστοῦ
INT: brothers good you will be a servant of Christ
ᾖ (ē) — 43 Occurrences
Matthew 6:4 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ὅπως ᾖ σου ἡ
INT: so that might be your
Matthew 6:22 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐὰν οὖν ᾖ ὁ ὀφθαλμός
INT: if therefore be the eye
Matthew 6:23 V-PSA-3S
GRK: σου πονηρὸς ᾖ ὅλον τὸ
INT: of you bad be all the
Matthew 10:13 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐὰν μὲν ᾖ ἡ οἰκία
INT: if indeed be the house
Matthew 10:13 V-PSA-3S
GRK: δὲ μὴ ᾖ ἀξία ἡ
INT: however not it be worthy the
Matthew 20:4 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ὃ ἐὰν ᾖ δίκαιον δώσω
INT: whatever if might be right I will give
Matthew 24:28 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ὅπου ἐὰν ᾖ τὸ πτῶμα
INT: For wherever if might be the carcass
Mark 5:18 V-PSA-3S
GRK: μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ
INT: with him he might be
Luke 10:6 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐὰν ἐκεῖ ᾖ υἱὸς εἰρήνης
INT: if there be a son of peace
Luke 11:34 V-PSA-3S
GRK: σου ἁπλοῦς ᾖ καὶ ὅλον
INT: of you clear be also all
Luke 11:34 V-PSA-3S
GRK: δὲ πονηρὸς ᾖ καὶ τὸ
INT: however evil it be also the
Luke 14:8 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐντιμότερός σου ᾖ κεκλημένος ὑπ’
INT: [one] more honorable than you might have been invited by
Luke 20:28 V-PSA-3S
GRK: οὗτος ἄτεκνος ᾖ ἵνα λάβῃ
INT: he childless is that should take
John 3:2 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ ὁ θεὸς
INT: if not be God
John 3:27 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ
INT: if not it be given to him
John 6:65 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ
INT: if not it be given to him
John 9:31 V-PSA-3S
GRK: τις θεοσεβὴς ᾖ καὶ τὸ
INT: anyone God-fearing is and the
John 14:16 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ὑμῖν ἵνα ᾖ μεθ’ ὑμῶν
INT: you that he might be with you
John 15:11 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐν ὑμῖν ᾖ καὶ ἡ
INT: in you might abide and the
John 16:24 V-PSA-3S
GRK: χαρὰ ὑμῶν ᾖ πεπληρωμένη
INT: joy of you might be full
John 17:26 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἐν αὐτοῖς ᾖ κἀγὼ ἐν
INT: in them might be and I in
Acts 5:38 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ὅτι ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων
INT: for if be from men
Romans 9:27 V-PSA-3S
GRK: Ἰσραήλ Ἐὰν ᾖ ὁ ἀριθμὸς
INT: Israel if should be the number
1 Corinthians 1:10 V-PSA-3S
GRK: καὶ μὴ ᾖ ἐν ὑμῖν
INT: and not there be among you
1 Corinthians 2:5 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ὑμῶν μὴ ᾖ ἐν σοφίᾳ
INT: of you not might be in wisdom
1 Corinthians 5:11 Conj
GRK: ἀδελφὸς ὀνομαζόμενος ᾖ πόρνος ἢ
INT: brother designated be either sexually immoral or
1 Corinthians 7:34 V-PSA-3S
GRK: κυρίου ἵνα ᾖ ἁγία καὶ
INT: Lord that she might be holy both
1 Corinthians 7:36 V-PSA-3S
GRK: νομίζει ἐὰν ᾖ ὑπέρακμος καὶ
INT: thinks if he be beyond [his] prime and
1 Corinthians 12:25 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἵνα μὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν
INT: that not there might be division in
1 Corinthians 14:28 V-PSA-3S
GRK: δὲ μὴ ᾖ διερμηνευτής σιγάτω
INT: however not there be an interpreter let him be silent
1 Corinthians 15:28 V-PSA-3S
GRK: πάντα ἵνα ᾖ ὁ θεὸς
INT: all things that might be God
1 Corinthians 16:4 V-PSA-3S
GRK: δὲ ἄξιον ᾖ τοῦ κἀμὲ
INT: moreover suitable it be me also
2 Corinthians 1:17 V-PSA-3S
GRK: βουλεύομαι ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ
INT: do I purpose that there should be with me
2 Corinthians 4:7 V-PSA-3S
GRK: τῆς δυνάμεως ᾖ τοῦ θεοῦ
INT: of the power might be of God
Galatians 5:10 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ὅστις ἐὰν ᾖ
INT: whoever if he might be
Ephesians 5:27 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἀλλ’ ἵνα ᾖ ἁγία καὶ
INT: but that it might be holy and
1 Timothy 4:15 V-PSA-3S
GRK: προκοπὴ φανερὰ ᾖ πᾶσιν
INT: progress manifest might be to all
2 Timothy 3:17 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἵνα ἄρτιος ᾖ ὁ τοῦ
INT: that complete might be the
Titus 1:9 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἵνα δυνατὸς ᾖ καὶ παρακαλεῖν
INT: that able he might be both to encourage
Philemon 1:14 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἀγαθόν σου ᾖ ἀλλὰ κατὰ
INT: good of you might be but effect
James 5:15 V-PSA-3S
GRK: κἂν ἁμαρτίας ᾖ πεποιηκώς ἀφεθήσεται
INT: and if sins he should be having committed it will be forgiven
1 John 1:4 V-PSA-3S
GRK: χαρὰ ἡμῶν ᾖ πεπληρωμένη
INT: joy of us might be complete
2 John 1:12 V-PSA-3S
GRK: ἡμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ
INT: of us might be complete being
ἦτε (ēte) — 19 Occurrences
John 9:41 V-II-2P
GRK: Εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε οὐκ ἂν
INT: If blind you were not anyhow
John 14:3 V-PSA-2P
GRK: καὶ ὑμεῖς ἦτε
INT: also you might be
John 15:19 V-II-2P
GRK: τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε ὁ κόσμος
INT: the world you were the world
Romans 6:17 V-II-2P
GRK: θεῷ ὅτι ἦτε δοῦλοι τῆς
INT: to God that you [once] were servants
Romans 6:20 V-II-2P
GRK: γὰρ δοῦλοι ἦτε τῆς ἁμαρτίας
INT: indeed servants you were of sin
Romans 6:20 V-II-2P
GRK: ἁμαρτίας ἐλεύθεροι ἦτε τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ
INT: of sin free you were as to righteousness
Romans 11:25 V-PSA-2P
GRK: ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρ’ ἑαυτοῖς
INT: that not you might be to yourselves
1 Corinthians 1:10 V-PSA-2P
GRK: ὑμῖν σχίσματα ἦτε δὲ κατηρτισμένοι
INT: you divisions you be moreover knit together
1 Corinthians 5:7 V-PSA-2P
GRK: ζύμην ἵνα ἦτε νέον φύραμα
INT: leaven that you might be a new lump
1 Corinthians 6:11 V-II-2P
GRK: ταῦτά τινες ἦτε ἀλλὰ ἀπελούσασθε
INT: these things some you were but you were washed
1 Corinthians 7:5 V-PSA-2P
GRK: τὸ αὐτὸ ἦτε ἵνα μὴ
INT: the same come together that not
1 Corinthians 12:2 V-II-2P
GRK: ὅτε ἔθνη ἦτε πρὸς τὰ
INT: when Gentiles you were to
2 Corinthians 9:3 V-PSA-2P
GRK: ἔλεγον παρεσκευασμένοι ἦτε
INT: I said prepared you might be
2 Corinthians 13:9 V-PSA-2P
GRK: δὲ δυνατοὶ ἦτε τοῦτο καὶ
INT: however strong might be But this also
Ephesians 2:12 V-II-2P
GRK: ὅτι ἦτε τῷ καιρῷ
INT: that you were the time
Ephesians 5:8 V-II-2P
GRK: ἦτε γάρ ποτε
INT: you were indeed once
Philippians 1:10 V-PSA-2P
GRK: διαφέροντα ἵνα ἦτε εἰλικρινεῖς καὶ
INT: are excellent that you might be pure and
James 1:4 V-PSA-2P
GRK: ἐχέτω ἵνα ἦτε τέλειοι καὶ
INT: let have that you might be perfect and
1 Peter 2:25 V-II-2P
GRK: ἦτε γὰρ ὡς
INT: you were indeed as
όλα
ALL
all (adj./adv.)
Old English eall “every, entire, the whole quantity of” (adj.), “fully, wholly, entirely” (adv.), from Proto-Germanic *alnaz (source also of Old Frisian, Old High German al; German all, alle; Old Norse allr; Gothic alls), with no certain connection outside Germanic. As a noun, in Old English, “all that is, everything.”
Combinations with all meaning “wholly, without limit” were common in Old English (such as eall-halig “all-holy,” eall-mihtig “all-mighty”) and the method continued to form new compound words throughout the history of English. Middle English had al-wher “wherever; whenever” (early 14c.); al-soon “as soon as possible,” al-what (c. 1300) “all sorts of things, whatever.”
Of the common modern phrases with it, at all “in any way” is from mid-14c., and all “and everything (else)” is from 1530s, all but “everything short of” is from 1590s. First record of all out “to one’s full powers” is 1880. All clear as a signal of “no danger” is recorded from 1902. All right, indicative of assent or approval, is attested by 1945.
ὅμοιος
LIKEWISE - LIKE KIND - SIMILAR TYPE - SAME THING
From ὁμός (homós, “same”) + -ιος (-ios, adjectival suffix)
Adjective
ὅμοιος • (hómoios) m (feminine ὁμοία, neuter ὅμοιον); first/second declension
Like, resembling [+dative = someone, something], similar [+dative = to someone, something] Shared, common, mutual Suited to, appropriate for Equal The same
Adjective
ὁμός • (homós) m (feminine ὁμή, neuter ὁμόν); first/second declension
same, common, joint
Adjective
ὅμορος • (hómoros) m or f (neuter ὅμορον); second declension
bordering, neighboring
ὁμός (homós, “same”) + ὅρος (hóros, “border”)
ξανά
AGAIN
From ἐξ (out from) + ἀνά (re- again, repeat)
Adverb
ξανά • (xaná)
again
Prefix ᾰ̓νᾰ- • (ana-) up to, upwards, up (intensifier) thoroughly indicating repetition or improvement: re-, again back, backwards
Preposition
ᾰ̓νᾰ́ • (aná) (governs the genitive, dative and accusative)
(+ genitive) (rare) on board (+ dative) (of location) on, upon (+ accusative) up, upwards, along in sequence, each, throughout up to (of amounts) at a rate, speed, or price of, for (of time) translatable with an adverbial noun phrase ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν anà pâsan hēméran every day ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος anà pân étos every year
Prefix
ἀν- • (an-)
Alternative form of ἀ- (a-) used before a vowel.
From Proto-Indo-European *n̥- (“not, un-”)
πάλι
AGAIN - ON THE OTHER HAND
Adverb
πάλι • (páli)
again
on the other hand
και πάλι (kai páli, “again, for one more time”, literally “and again”)
πάλι καλά (που …) (páli kalá (pou …), “luckily, good”, literally “good/well again”)
επίσης
ALSO - TO - LIKEWISE
from ἐπί (up, upon) and ἴσης (equal).
επίσης
also, as well, too, likewise
επί πλέον
moreover, furthermore, also, over and above
Adverb επίσης • (epísis) also, too, likewise Καληνύχτα! — Επίσης! Kalinýchta! — Epísis! Goodnight! — Likewise! (a reply to return good wishes)
from ἐπί (up, upon) and ἴσης (equal)
Adjective
ῐ̓́σος
(of size, strength, or number) equal (to), equivalent (to), the same as [+dative = something, someone]
(of appearance) like [+dative = something, someone]
(with implied reference point) like, similar
(with pronoun) like someone’s x
repeated to denote relationship between equal persons or things
ἴσα πρὸς ἴσα
ísa pròs ísa
tit for tat
(not comparable, mathematics) equal to [+dative = a number]; (in the plural) equal (to each other)
(of land) even, level, flat neuter singular (τὸ) ἴσον ((tò) íson) as substantive: level ground εἰς τὸ ἴσον eis tò íson (on)to level ground
ἴσα πρὸς ἴσα
TIT for TAT (equal for equal)
From ῐ̓́σᾰ (equal) + πρὸς (to, toward)
ἴσα πρὸς ἴσα
tit for tat
Adjective
ῐ̓́σᾰ • (ísa)
neuter nominative/accusative/vocative plural of ῐ̓́σος (ísos)
εἰς τὸ ἴσον
ON LEVEL GROUND - EQUAL STANDING
εἰς τὸ ἴσον
(on)to level ground
εκ νέου
ONCE AGAIN - REFRESH
εκ νέου
again, anew, afresh
afresh, again, over again, de novo
Adjective
νέου • (néou)
genitive singular masculine/neuter of νέος (néos)
Adjective
νέος • (néos) m (feminine νέᾱ, neuter νέον); first/second declension
young
(pertaining to young people) youthful
new, fresh
(euphemistic, especially in comparative) unexpected, strange, evil.
Adjective
νέα • (néa)
Nominative, accusative and vocative singular feminine form of νέος (néos).
Nominative, accusative and vocative plural neuter form of νέος (néos).
Noun[edit]
νέα • (néa) n
(only in the plural) news (on the radio, or TV)
Θα δω τα νέα των οκτώ.
Tha do ta néa ton októ.
Ι’ll watch the eight o’clock news.
Synonym: ειδήσεις (eidíseis)
Nominative, accusative and vocative plural form of νέο (néo).
Υπάρχουν καθόλου νέα για την καταιγίδα;
Ypárchoun kathólou néa gia tin kataigída?
Is there any news about the storm?
ἄχρῐ
ακμή
ἀκμάζω
UTTERLY - EVEN UP TO - SO LONG AS
ἄχρι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: achri or achris Phonetic Spelling: (akh'-ree) Definition: until, as far as Usage: as far as, up to, until, during.
as far as, for, until, while.
Or achris akh’-rece; akin to akron (through the idea of a terminus); (of time) until or (of place) up to – as far as, for, in(-to), till, (even, un-)to, until, while. Compare mechri.
see GREEK akron
see GREEK mechri
Adverb
ἄχρῐ • (ákhri)
to the very bottom, to the uttermost, utterly
(after Homer, before prepositions)
Preposition ἄχρῐ • (ákhri) (governs the genitive) even to, as far as (of time) until (of space) as far as, even to (of measure or degree) up to this point
Conjunction
ἄχρῐ • (ákhri)
(of time) until, so long as
(of space) so far as
Zero grade of μέχρῐ (mékhri), from Proto-Indo-European *méǵʰ(s)ri.
ἄκρον, ου, τό Part of Speech: Noun, Neuter Transliteration: akron Phonetic Spelling: (ak'-ron) Definition: highest, extreme Usage: the end, extremity. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin from akros; from the same as akantha
ἄκρος, , (ἀκή point (see ἀκμή)) (from Homer down), highest, extreme; τό ἄκρον the topmost point, the extremity.
tip, top, highest point
Neuter of an adjective probably akin to the base of akmen; the extremity – one end… Other, tip, top, uttermost participle
see GREEK akmen
ἀκμήν Part of Speech: Noun, Feminine Transliteration: akmén Phonetic Spelling: (ak-mane') Definition: at the present point of time Usage: even now. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin acc. of the same as akmazó
ἀκμάζω Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: akmazó Phonetic Spelling: (ak-mad'-zo) Definition: to be at the prime Usage: I reach maturity, become ripe, am in full vigor. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin from ακμή (a point, edge)
be fully ripe.
From the same as akmen; to make a point, i.e. (figuratively) mature – be fully ripe.
see GREEK akmen
ακμή
acne, prosperity, prime, heyday, acme, point
Noun ακμή • (akmí) f (plural ακμές) peak acme point, tip edge prosperity prime, peak, zenith (medicine) crisis (medicine) acne, zit
Noun
παρακμή • (parakmí) f (plural παρακμές)
decay, decadence, decline
Adjective
ακμαίος • (akmaíos) m (feminine ακμαία, neuter ακμαίο)
flourishing, vigorous, thriving
Verb
ακμάζω • (akmázo) (past άκμασα)
prosper, flourish, blossom
Noun
ακμαιότητα • (akmaiótita) f (uncountable)
liveliness, vigour (UK)/vigor (US)
From Koine Greek ἀκμαιότης (akmaiótēs), equivalent to ακμαίος (akmaíos, “lively, vigorous”) + -ότητα (-ótita, “-ity, -ness”).
Suffix
-ότητα • (-ótita) f
Added to an adjective or rarely, another noun, to create an abstract noun; -ity, -ty, -ness, -cy, -ion:
αυστηρός (afstirós, “strict”) + -ότητα (-ótita) → αυστηρότητα (afstirótita, “strictness”)
βέβαιος (vévaios, “sure, certain”) + -ότητα (-ótita) → βεβαιότητα (vevaiótita, “certainty”)
εθνικός (ethnikós, “national”) + -ότητα (-ótita) → εθνικότητα (ethnikótita, “nationality”)
εχθρός (echthrós, “enemy”) + -ότητα (-ótita) → εχθρότητα (echthrótita, “hostility”)
πιθανός (pithanós, “possible”) + -ότητα (-ótita) → πιθανότητα (pithanótita, “possibility”)
ποιος (poios, “who”) + -ότητα (-ótita) → ποιότητα (poiótita, “quality”)
πόσος (pósos, “how much”) + -ότητα (-ótita) → ποσότητα (posótita, “quantity”)
ὥστε
AND AS (additionally, like this)
From ὡς (hōs, “as”) + τε (te, “and”)
the introduction to similes
like as, as, just as
Conjunction
ὥστε • (hṓste)
(to express the actual or intended result, the effect)
ὥσ [hōs], “as” and τε [té], (“both-and”)
ὥστε Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: hóste Phonetic Spelling: (hoce'-teh) Definition: so as to, so then, therefore Usage: so that, therefore, so then, so as to.
5620 hṓste (a conjunction, derived from 5613 /hōs, “as” and 5037 /té, “both-and”) – wherefore (with the result that both . . . ), connecting cause to necessary effect which emphasizes the result (the combined, end-accomplishment). The result involved then is the combination of both elements in the correlation, underscoring the inevitable effect of the paired elements.
[This common point (“fulcrum”) of the correlation is the key link for yielding the result of the cause-and-effect relationship.]
Pronoun
ὅς • (hós) m, ἥ f (hḗ), ὅ n (hó)
(in Homeric Greek, often demonstrative pronoun) this
(relative) who, which, that
Adverb ὡς • (hōs) (relative adverb) the introduction to similes like as, as, just as according as (with adverbial clauses) (parenthetically) to qualify a general statement; as it seems (in elliptical phrases) so far as.... (attached to the object of a verb) as (to limit or augment the force of adverbs)
Conjunction
ὡς • (hōs)
(subordinating conjunction or complementizer, introducing dependent or subordinate clause)
(with noun clauses) introducing a clause expressing a fact: that (with indicative or optative)
(final) introducing a clause expressing an end or purpose: that, so that, in order that, so (with subjunctive or optative)
(consequential) introducing a clause expressing a result: so that
(causal) as, since, because
(temporal) when
(modal) how
(local) where
See also Etymology 2 PIE word *só From the demonstrative pronoun ὁ (ho) + -ως (-ōs, adverbial suffix). Adverb[edit] ὡς • (hōs) (demonstrative adverb) in καὶ ὧς: even so, nevertheless in comparisons, ὥς (hṓs)... ὡς (hōs) or ὡς (hōs)... ὣς (hṑs): so... as... thus, for instance
———————————————————————-
Compare English: As
Comparison - to the extent or degree
adverb
adverb: as
used in comparisons to refer to the extent or degree of something.
“go as fast as you can”
conjunction: as
1. used to indicate that something happens during the time when something is taking place.
“Frank watched him as he ambled through the crowd”
Similar:
while
just as
even as
at the (same) time that
at the moment that
during the time that
just when
simultaneously
2. used to indicate by comparison the way that something happens or is done. "they can do as they wish" Similar: in the (same) way that the (same) way in the (same) manner that like
3. because; since. "I must stop now as I have to go out" Similar: because since seeing that seeing as considering that on account of the fact that in view of the fact that owing to the fact that on account of for forasmuch
4. even though. "sweet as he is, he doesn't pay his bills" Similar: although though even though/if in spite of the fact that despite the fact that notwithstanding the fact that notwithstanding that for all that while whilst albeit however
preposition: as
1. used to refer to the function or character that someone or something has.
“it came as a shock”
Similar:
in the guise of
with the appearance of
in the character of
so as to appear to be
in the role of
being
acting as
functioning as
2. during the time of being (the thing specified).
“he had often been sick as a child”
——————————————————
Compare Latin: sī
Etymology
From Proto-Italic *sei (“so, thus”) used in parataxis, likely via the meaning “in this” as the locative singular of Proto-Indo-European *só (“this, that”); this older meaning is preserved in Latin sīc as well as in the oath sī dīs placet, c.f. English so help me God. Related to Old English sē (“he, that”).
Conjunction
sī
if, supposing that Sī versūs hōrum duōrum poētārum neglegētis, magnā parte litterārum carēbitis. If you neglect the verses of these two poets, you will miss a great part of literature. whether (when a verb of seeing or trying is the main verb in the apodosis; or when sī is used twice correlatively) sī... sī ― whether... or Derived terms[edit] sīc (“so, thus”) sīcut (“as”) sīs (“if you will”) sīve / seu (“disjunctive sī”) sōdēs (“if you will”) ac sī (“just as if”) nisi (“unless”) quasi (“as if, like”) sī(n) aliter (“if otherwise”) sī dīs placet (“expr. of indignant surprise”) sīcubi (“if anywhere”) sīcunde (“if from anywhere”) sīn (“if however”) sī mē amās (“please”) sī minus (“if not”) sī modo (“provided that”) sī nōn (“if not”) sī̆ quandō (“if ever”) sī̆ quidem (“if/since indeed”) sī quis / sī quid (“if anybody/anything”) sī vīs (“if you like”) sī vīvō (“as sure as I'm alive”) sī nōndum (“if not yet”)
έπειτα
THEN — THEREUPON — THEREAFTER — (IF THIS / THEN THAT)
From ἐπί (“upon”) + εἶτα (if that)
From εἰ (“if”) and root of τά (the or that).
έπειτα
Adverb
ἔπειτα • (épeita)
(of mere sequence, without any notion of cause) thereupon, thereafter, then
(with the article) what follows
(like εἶτα, with a finite verb after a participle)
(in apodoses, though never at the beginning of the clause, in Homer often strengthened)
(after a temporal conjunction) then, thereafter
(after a conditional conjunction) then, surely
(of sequence in thought, i.e. consequence or inference) then, therefore
(to begin a story)
(in Attic often to introduce emphatic questions)
Adverb
εἶτα • (eîta)
(of mere sequence) then, next
(often stands with the finite verb after a participle, where the participle may be resolved into a finite verb and εἶτα rendered “and then”, “and yet”, expressing surprise or incongruity)
(to denote consequence) and so, so then, therefore, accordingly
Article
τά • (tá)
neuter nominative/accusative plural of ὁ (ho)
Article
ὁ • (ho) m, ἡ f (hē), τό n (tó)
(“The”)
(rarely in Epic, often in later Greek) the
Pronoun
ὁ • (ho) m, ἡ f (hē), τό n (tó)
(“That”)
(Epic, demonstrative) that
(Epic, third person personal pronoun) he, she, it, they
(relative, Epic, Ionic, poetic Attic) who, which, that
Εξάλλου
MOREOVER — BESIDES THIS — AWAY FROM THE OTHER
From Εξ (out from) + άλλου (other, different)
Adverb
Εξάλλου
moreover ( opposite link )
Moreover , besides this
Pronoun
άλλου • (állou)
Genitive singular masculine form of άλλος (állos).
Genitive singular neuter form of άλλος (állos).
άλλος • (állos) m (feminine άλλη, neuter άλλο) indefinite, contrastive
other
Τρώω τα μήλα, τα άλλα φρούτα δεν τα τρώω.
Tróo ta míla, ta álla froúta den ta tróo.
I eat apples, I don’t like other fruit.
else
Θέλετε κάτι άλλο;
Thélete káti állo?
Do you want anything else?
someone else
Όχι, αυτός που ήρθε ήταν άλλος.
Óchi, aftós pou írthe ítan állos.
No, the one who came was someone else.
more
άλλη μια φορά ― álli mia forá ― one more time, another time
τιποτ’ άλλο; ― tipot’ állo? ― any more?
next
ο άλλος κόσμος ― o állos kósmos ― the next world
την άλλη Παρασκευή ― tin álli Paraskeví ― next Friday
(without article) dissimilar, different
άλλος κόσμος ― állos kósmos ― a different world
Translations of moreover
Adverb
εξάλλου
moreover, in addition
επί πλέον
moreover, furthermore, also, over and above
εκτός τούτου
moreover
ὥσπερ
JUST AS - JUST EXACTLY LIKE
ὥσπερ Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: hósper Phonetic Spelling: (hoce'-per) Definition: just as, even as Usage: just as, as, even as. HELPS Word-studies 5618 hṓsper (an emphatic adverb, derived from 4007 /per, "indeed" intensifying 5613 /hōs, "as") – "indeed just as," "just exactly like."
hós: as, like as, even as, when, since, as long as
Original Word: ὡς
Part of Speech: Adverb
Transliteration: hós
Phonetic Spelling: (hoce)
Definition: as, like as, even as, when, since, as long as
Usage: as, like as, about, as it were, according as, how, when, while, as soon as, so that.
Strong's Concordance hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
per: whosoever
Original Word: περ
Transliteration: per
Phonetic Spelling: (per)
Definition: indeed (adds force to the preceding word)
HELPS Word-studies
4007 per (an emphatic particle derived from 4012 /perí, “concerning, all about”) – fully concerning; wholly, very, really – literally “all-around” the whole perimeter; (figuratively) to the limit, beyond what is expected (usual).
however much, very much, altogether, indeed
From the base of peran; an enclitic particle significant of abundance (thoroughness), i.e. Emphasis; much, very or ever – (whom-)soever.
peran: on the other side Original Word: πέραν Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: peran Phonetic Spelling: (per'-an) Definition: on the other side Usage: over, on the other side, beyond.
with verbs of going it marks direction toward a place (over, beyond)
beyond, further, over.
Apparently accusative case of an obsolete derivative of peiro (to “pierce”); through (as adverb or preposition), i.e. Across – beyond, farther (other) side, over.
from hós and per
προσέτι
FURTHERMORE - ADDITIONALLY
προσέτι
furthermore, withal, thereunto
Adverb
προσέτῐ • (proséti)
besides, in addition
πρός (“in addition”) and ἔτι (“further, more, extra”).
Adverb ἔτῐ • (éti) (of time) yet, still (of the present) (of the past, mostly with imperfect) (of the future) (with a negative) no more, no longer (of degree) yet, still, besides, further, moreover (often to strengthen a comparative) (with the positive)
επί πλέον
ABOVE MORE THAN — OVER AND ABOVE — ABOVE ALL — MORE THAN THAT
επί πλέον
moreover, furthermore, also, over and above
Adverb
πλέον • (pléon)
(dated, formal) more, -er (forms comparatives)
Ο πλέον γνωστός ηθοποιός.
O pléon gnostós ithopoiós.
The more known actor.
already
Είναι πλέον αργά.
Eínai pléon argá.
It’s already late.
from now on
Υποσχέθηκε να είναι πλέον πιστός στην φιλενάδα του.
Yposchéthike na eínai pléon pistós stin filenáda tou.
He promised to be faithful to his girlfriend from now on.
more than
Πλέον των διακοσίων χιλιάδων βγήκαν να ψηφίσουν.
Pléon ton diakosíon chiliádon vgíkan na psifísoun.
More than two hundred thousand came out to vote.
———————————————
Preposition[edit]
ἐπῐ́ • (epí) (governs the genitive, dative and accusative)
(+ genitive) on, upon (on the upper surface of) quotations ▼ καθέζεται ἐπὶ θρόνου. kathézetai epì thrónou. He sits down on the throne. on (supported by) quotations ▼ (mostly post-Homeric) in quotations ▼ at, near quotations ▼ (of ships) at (dependent upon) ὁρμεῖν ἐπ’ ἀγκύρας hormeîn ep’ ankúras to ride at anchor (with reflexive or personal pronoun) by oneself ἐφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἐχώρουν eph’ heautôn ekhṓroun They proceeded by themselves. (with numerals, of a body of soldiers) deep quotations ▼ ἐτάχθησαν ἐπὶ τεττάρων etákhthēsan epì tettárōn They formed a line four men deep. (with a person) before (in the presence of) quotations ▼ in the case of; on quotations ▼ ἐπὶ τῶν πλουσίων […] αἰσθάνομαι epì tôn plousíōn […] aisthánomai In the case of the rich, I can see that […] in the time of quotations ▼ (of authority, power, etc.) in quotations ▼ οἰ έπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων oi épì tôn pragmátōn the [men] in power on (an occasion) quotations ▼ (+ dative) on, upon quotations ▼ καθέζεται ἐπὶ θρόνῳ. kathézetai epì thrónōi. He sits down on the throne. in quotations ▼ at, near quotations ▼ over quotations ▼ in honor of quotations ▼ against quotations ▼ in addition to, over, besides quotations ▼ (with duplication of head noun) after quotations ▼ ὄγχνη ἐπ’ ὄγχνῃ γηράσκει ónkhnē ep’ ónkhnēi gēráskei One pear after another ripens. in the power of quotations ▼ according to quotations ▼ (of conditions or circumstances) in, with quotations ▼ (of time, never in proper Attic) at, on quotations ▼ (of time) after quotations ▼ (expressing a cause) on account of, for quotations ▼ (expressing a purpose) for quotations ▼ (of a condition) on quotations ▼ for (i.e. in exchange for) quotations ▼ (of a name) for quotations ▼ in charge of quotations ▼ (+ accusative) onto (the upper surface of) quotations ▼ ἀνέβαινεν ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον anébainen epì tòn híppon He got up onto the horse. to quotations ▼ up to, as far as quotations ▼ (with a person) to before, into the presence of quotations ▼ (of an army) deep quotations ▼ to or into a certain side quotations ▼ against quotations ▼ over quotations ▼ (of time) for, during quotations ▼ (of time) up to, until quotations ▼ for (the purpose of) quotations ▼ for (with respect to) quotations ▼ over (in command of) quotations ▼ (without a noun) as well, besides (often with δέ (dé)) quotations ▼
εκτός τούτου
EXCEPT THIS — OUT OF THIS — MOREOVER
εκτός τούτου
moreover
From εκτός (except) + τούτου (this)
Adverb
εκτός • (ektós)
except
out, outside
See Also in Greek out of preposition, conjunction, adverb Common interpretation ektós except , outside , unless , out , besides of this adverb
uncommon interpretation
toútou thereof
See Also in English
except preposition
common
except , min
this
pronoun
common
this , he , toutos
Adjective
τούτου • (toútou)
genitive singular masculine/neuter of οὗτος (hoûtos)
Determiner
οὗτος • (hoûtos), f αὕτη (haútē), n τοῦτο (toûto) (medial demonstrative determiner and pronoun)
this
(of place) here
in contrast with ὅδε (hóde): the preceding
in contrast with ἐκεῖνος (ekeînos): the latter
of someone or something famous or infamous
Determiner τούτος • (toútos) m (demonstrative determiner, feminine τούτη, neuter τούτο) (formal) this, this one, that Τούτος εδώ είναι ο αδελφός μου. Toútos edó eínai o adelfós mou. This one here is my brother. Πέραν τούτου, η ιδέα δεν είχε νόημα. Péran toútou, i idéa den eíche nóima. Beyond that, the idea didn't make sense. Τούτο μόνο σου ζητώ και τίποτε άλλο. Toúto móno sou zitó kai típote állo. I ask you only this and nothing else.
Determiner
αυτός • (aftós) m (a demonstrative determiner, feminine αυτή, neuter αυτό)
this (masculine singular, nominative
declension of ‘αυτός’
Synonyms
τούτος (toútos, “this, this one”) (more formal)
Pronoun
αυτός • (aftós)
(personal pronoun) he (3rd person masculine singular, nominative)
(demonstrative pronoun) this
αυτό εδώ ― aftó edó ― this one (literally, “this here”)
αυτό θελώ. ― aftó theló. ― I want this.
(demonstrative pronoun) that
αυτό εκεί ― aftó ekeí ― that one (literally, “that there”)
και τούτο και το άλλο
AND THIS AND THE OTHER — THIS AND THAT
και τούτο και το άλλο
προς τούτοις
BEFORE THIS — AFTER ALL — PRECEDING THIS
προς τούτοις (pros toútois, “moreover”)
Preposition
πρός • (prós) (governs the genitive, dative and accusative)
(of direction) forward to, toward
(with genitive) the side of, pertaining to
(with dative) by the side of, near to
(with accusative) the place, time, occasion, or respect, which is the destination of the relation, or whither or for which it is predicated: about, according to, against, among, at, because of, before, between, ([where-]) by, for, at someone’s house, in, for intent, nigh unto, of, which pertain to, that, to (the end that), together, to ([you]) -ward, unto, with (-in)
παρομοίως
SIMILARLY - BESIDES THE SAME
Translation and Meaning of παρομοίως in Almaany English-Greek Dictionary in the same way similarly , similar likewise also, similarly , similarly similarly similarly, similarly the same to you similarly
συγκριτικά
COMPARATIVELY
From συγ (with, together) + κριτικά (critic)
κριτικά
Critic
Adverb
critically
in a critical mood
the author is critical of the classical Marxist view of social phenomena …
κριτικάρω
Criticize
Verb
κριτικάρω
criticize
επικρίνω
criticize, decry, scarify, upbraid, crab, animadvert
κρίνω
judge, criticize, decide, think, reason
καθώς
AS — ACCORDING TO — JUST AS
καθώς Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: kathos Phonetic Spelling: (kath-oce') Definition: according as, just as
Usage: according to the manner in which, in the degree that, just as, as.
(an adverb derived from 2596 /
katá, “according to” and /hōs, “as compared to, to the extent of”)
properly, “in proportion, to the degree that”
just as (in direct proportion)
corresponding to fully (exactly).
οἷος
SUCH AS
Why does the law begin with the concept of a God?
God given right…
Right given by our humanity…
What is authority?
Who is in the position of authority?
Where does authority as a power first originate?
Where does a right first originate?
Who owns or holds a right?
How is a right proven to be held or owned?
How is a right acquired, gained, born, or held?
How is a rights given, gifted, conveyed, delegated, granted, or donated?
How is a right lost, limited, restricted, impeded or interdicted?
What is power? (Obedience?) — (Courage?) — (Risk?) — (Harm?) — (Military?)
How is a right enforced?
Who has the power to enforce and defend a right?
Who is tasked to enforce?
Where does the enforcement agent acquire their right to enforce?
————————————————————-
Demonstrative
Determiner
Intensifier
Comparison
Contrast
Like this
Up to this Extreme limit, but no further
Emphasis
Intensifier
Summary, conclusion
List — In addition, Finally
Time sequence
Agreement
Chain of (title, custody, derivation)
——————————————————————
Greek:
Ancient: οἷος m (hoîos), τοιοῦτος m (toioûtos)
Determiner
οἷος • (hoîos) (feminine οἵᾱ, neuter οἷον)
relative adjective of quality such as; what sort, manner, kind of
introducing an exclamation
(in an independent clause) what a (great, terrible) …!
(in a subordinate clause) the (great, terrible) sort that
430 BCE – 354 BCE, Xenophon, Anabasis 3.1.15:
ἐγώ, ὦ ἄνδρες λοχαγοί, οὔτε καθεύδειν δύναμαι, ὥσπερ οἶμαι οὐδ’ ὑμεῖς, οὔτε κατακεῖσθαι ἔτι, ὁρῶν ἐν οἵοις ἐσμέν.
egṓ, ô ándres lokhagoí, oúte katheúdein dúnamai, hṓsper oîmai oud’ humeîs, oúte katakeîsthai éti, horôn en hoíois esmén.
Commanders, I can neither sleep, as I suppose neither can you, nor lie down, seeing the terrible sort of situation we are in.
429 BCE, Sophocles, Oedipus the King 624
429 BCE, Sophocles, Oedipus the King 1402
429 BCE, Sophocles, Oedipus the King 1488
430 BCE – 354 BCE, Xenophon, Cyropaedia 3.2.12
containing a comparison, and sometimes an inference
in many Homeric expressions the omission of the antecedent clause is to be noticed
especially in Attic often stands for ὅτι τοῖος/τοία/τοῖον (hóti toîos/toía/toîon), so that the relative introduces the reason for the preceding statement
if it is to be intimated that the reason is self-evident, and the assertion is beyond doubt, then δή (dḗ) is added
but if the comparison or inference only denotes a general or doubtful resemblance, then Homer uses οἷός τε (hoîós te)
when a comparison involves a definition of time οἷος ὅτε (hoîos hóte) is used
many brief Attic expressions are also explained by the omission of the demonstrative pronoun before οἷος (hoîos)
never used like the adverb οἷον (hoîon) with a positive adjective
οἷος (hoîos) with an infinitive implies fitness or ability in or for a thing quotations ▼
but this sense is commonly expressed by οἷος τε (hoîos te) quotations ▼
(without infinitive) quotations ▼
the relative is in Attic often repeated in the same clause
——————————————————————
As a Pronoun
such
A person, a thing, people or things like the one or ones already mentioned.
1804, Joseph Addison, Richard Steele, The Tatler, C. Whittingham, John Sharpe, page 315:
These oraculous proficients are day and night employed in deep searches for the direction of such as run astray after their lost goods : but at present they are more particularly serviceable to their country in foretelling the fate of such as have chances in the public lottery.
1913, Joseph C. Lincoln, chapter 1, in Mr. Pratt’s Patients:
‘Twas early June, the new grass was flourishing everywheres, the posies in the yard—peonies and such—in full bloom, the sun was shining, and the water of the bay was blue, with light green streaks where the shoal showed.
2000, Terry Goodkind, Faith of the Fallen, →ISBN, page 238:
Some are just no-good locals—drunks and such—who’d just as soon beg or steal as work.
————————————————————————-
As a Determiner
such
(demonstrative) Like this, that, these, those; used to make a comparison with something implied by context.
I’ve never seen such clouds in the sky before. Such is life
1898, Winston Churchill, chapter 2, in The Celebrity:
I had occasion […] to make a somewhat long business trip to Chicago, and on my return […] I found Farrar awaiting me in the railway station. He smiled his wonted fraction by way of greeting, […], and finally leading me to his buggy, turned and drove out of town. I was completely mystified at such an unusual proceeding.
1918, W. B. Maxwell, chapter 2, in The Mirror and the Lamp[1]:
She was a fat, round little woman, richly apparelled in velvet and lace, […]; and the way she laughed, cackling like a hen, the way she talked to the waiters and the maid, […]—all these unexpected phenomena impelled one to hysterical mirth, and made one class her with such immortally ludicrous types as Ally Sloper, the Widow Twankey, or Miss Moucher.
2013 June 1, “A better waterworks”, in The Economist[2], volume 407, number 8838, page 5 (Technology Quarterly):
An artificial kidney these days still means a refrigerator-sized dialysis machine. Such devices mimic the way real kidneys cleanse blood and eject impurities and surplus water as urine.
(particularly used in formal documents) Any.
the above address or at such other address as may be provided
Used as an intensifier; roughly equivalent to very much of.
The party was such a bore. “Bottomless” is such a lie.
1879, R[ichard] J[efferies], chapter 1, in The Amateur Poacher, London: Smith, Elder, & Co., […], OCLC 752825175:
They burned the old gun that used to stand in the dark corner up in the garret, close to the stuffed fox that always grinned so fiercely. Perhaps the reason why he seemed in such a ghastly rage was that he did not come by his death fairly. Otherwise his pelt would not have been so perfect. And why else was he put away up there out of sight?—and so magnificent a brush as he had too. […].
1898, Winston Churchill, chapter 4, in The Celebrity:
Mr. Cooke at once began a tirade against the residents of Asquith for permitting a sandy and generally disgraceful condition of the roads. So roundly did he vituperate the inn management in particular, and with such a loud flow of words, that I trembled lest he should be heard on the veranda.
1959, Georgette Heyer, chapter 1, in The Unknown Ajax:
Charles had not been employed above six months at Darracott Place, but he was not such a whopstraw as to make the least noise in the performance of his duties when his lordship was out of humour.
(obsolete) A certain; representing the object as already particularized in terms which are not mentioned. quotations ▲
1595, Samuel Daniel, “(please specify the folio number)”, in The First Fowre Bookes of the Ciuile Wars between the Two Houses of Lancaster and Yorke, London: […] P[eter] Short for Simon Waterson, OCLC 28470143:
In rushed one and tells him such a knight / Is new arrived.
1611, The Holy Bible, […] (King James Version), London: […] Robert Barker, […], OCLC 964384981, James 4:13:
To-day or to-morrow we will go into such a city, and continue there a year.
τοιοῦτος
SUCH AS THIS
τοιοῦτος: such as this, such
from toios (such, such-like) and houtos,
Original Word: τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο Part of Speech: Demonstrative Pronoun Transliteration: toioutos Phonetic Spelling: (toy-oo'-tos) Definition: such as this, such Usage: of such a kind, such.
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο Part of Speech: Demonstrative Pronoun Transliteration: houtos, hauté, touto Phonetic Spelling: (hoo'-tos) Definition: this Usage: this; he, she, it.
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, demonstrative pronoun (cf. Curtius, p. 543), Hebrew זֶה, זֹאת, this; used:
I. absolutely.
this one, visibly present here:
according to the nature and character of the person or thing mentioned, it is used with a suggestion
it refers to a subject immediately preceding, the one just named:
ὁ, ἡ, τό Part of Speech: Definite Article Transliteration: ho, hé, to Phonetic Spelling: (ho) Definition: the Usage: the, the definite article.
Strong’s Concordance
toi: an enclitic particle of asseveration used as a prefix or suff. in the N.T.
Original Word: τοί
Transliteration: toi
Phonetic Spelling: (toy)
Definition: an enclitic particle of asseveration used as a prefix or suff. in the N.T
HELPS Word-studies
5104 toí – indeed-consequently (often translated therefore, thereupon, whereupon). “In the NT, 5102 (títlos) is only used in composition” (Zodhiates, Dictionary), i.e. in a compound term like 2544 (kaítoige) or 5106 (toínyn).
ethical dat. of su
su: you (early mod. Eng. thou) Original Word: σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ Part of Speech: Personal Pronoun Transliteration: su Phonetic Spelling: (soo) Definition: you (early mod. Eng. thou) Usage: you.
such (adj.)
c. 1200, Old English swylc, swilc “just as, as, in like manner; as if, as though; such a one, he” (pronoun and adjective),
from a Proto-Germanic compound *swalikaz “so formed” (source also of Old Saxon sulik, Old Norse slikr, Old Frisian selik, Middle Dutch selc, Dutch zulk, Old High German sulih, German solch, Gothic swaleiks),
from swa “so” (see so) + *likan “form,”
source of Old English gelic “similar” (see like (adj.)).
Colloquial suchlike (early 15c.) is pleonastic. Related entries & more
so (adv.)
Old English swa, swæ (adv., conj., pron.) “in this way,” also “to that extent; so as, consequently, therefore,” and purely intensive; from Proto-Germanic *swa (source also of Old Saxon, Middle Dutch, Old High German so, Old Norse sva, Danish saa, Swedish så, Old Frisian sa, Dutch zo, German so “so,” Gothic swa “as”), from PIE reflexive pronominal stem *swo- “so” (source also of Greek hos “as,” Old Latin suad “so,” Latin se “himself”), derivative of *s(w)e-, pronoun of the third person and reflexive (see idiom).
Old English swa frequently was strengthened by eall, and so also is contained in compounds as, also, such. The -w- was eliminated by contraction from 12c.; compare two, which underwent the same process but retained its spelling.
ὅστις
ὅσος
WHO SO EVER
hoti: that, because
Original Word: ὅτι Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: hoti Phonetic Spelling: (hot'-ee) Definition: that, because Usage: that, since, because; may introduce direct discourse.
I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that;
- joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the accusative and infinitive is used in Latin):
———————————————————
ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅτι Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hostis, hétis, ho ti Phonetic Spelling: (hos'-tis) Definition: whoever, anyone who Usage: whosoever, whichsoever, whatsoever.
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
—————————————————————-
tis: a certain one, someone, anyone.
Original Word: τις, τι
Part of Speech: Indefinite Pronoun
Transliteration: tis
Phonetic Spelling: (tis)
Definition: a certain one, someone, anyone
Usage: any one, some one, a certain one or thing.
- a certain, a certain one; used of persons and things concerning which the writer either cannot or will not speak more particularly;
joined to nouns and signifying some: χρόνον τινα, some time, a while.
standing alone, or used substantively, and signifying someone, something; anyone, anything: universally.
———————————————————-
ὅσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Pronoun Transliteration: hosos Phonetic Spelling: (hos'-os) Definition: how much, how many Usage: how much, how great, how many, as great as, as much.
επίσης
ALSO (sequel to a preceding statement)
from ἐπί (on, upon, above) and ἴσης (similar, like).
επίσης
also, as well, too, likewise
επί πλέον
moreover, furthermore, also, over and above
Used in Old English to introduce a sequel to a preceding statement…
“and so, then, therefore.”
———————————————————-
also (adv., conj.)
Old English eallswa “just as, even as, as if, so as, likewise,”
contraction of eal swa,
from all “altogether” + so.
Originally an emphatic form of so.
The sense of “wholly so” weakened to “in addition to, in the same way,” replacing eke.
Used in Old English to introduce a sequel to a preceding statement…
“and so, then, therefore.”
Used from c. 1200 in connecting sentences, “in addition, moreover.”
The compound has parallel forms in German also, Dutch alzoo. English as is a shortened form of it.
Early ME has the phrase as well as the compound. The reduced forms alse, als, as gradually become established in certain constructions, the fuller also in others …. The clear distinction between also and as is not attained until the 15th century.
———————————————————————
Etymology
Univerbation of the Ancient Greek phrase ἐπ’ ἴσης (ep’ ísēs),
from ἐπί (on, upon, above) and ἴσης (similar, like).
Adverb επίσης • (epísis) also, too, likewise Καληνύχτα! — Επίσης! Kalinýchta! — Epísis! Goodnight! — Likewise! (a reply to return good wishes)
———————————————————
LIKE - SIMILAR - JUST AS THIS
Adjective
ῐ̓́σης • (ísēs)
feminine genitive singular of ῐ̓́σος (ísos)
Adjective
ῐ̓́σος • (ísos) m (feminine ῐ̓́ση, neuter ῐ̓́σον); first/second declension.
ῐ̓́σος (of size, strength, or number) equal (to) equivalent (to) the same as [+dative = something, someone]
ῐ̓́σος
(of appearance) like [+dative = something, someone]
(with implied reference point) like, similar
(with pronoun) like someone’s x
repeated to denote relationship between equal persons or things.
ἴσα πρὸς ἴσα
ísa pròs ísa
tit for tat
ῐ̓́σος
(not comparable, mathematics) equal to [+dative = a number]; (in the plural) equal (to each other)
(not comparable, geometry, of lines) of equal length; (of shapes) congruent; of equal area
just, fair
(comparable, politics) equal in rights, based on equality of rights
(of persons) impartial
neuter plural τὰ ἴσα (tà ísa) as substantive: equal rights, equality
(rare) adequate
(of land) even, level, flat
neuter singular (τὸ) ἴσον ((tò) íson) as substantive: level ground
εἰς τὸ ἴσον
eis tò íson
(on)to level ground
ὡς ἰσαίτατα (hōs isaítata): as equally as possible
επίσης
ALSO (likewise)
equal (to), equivalent (to), the same as
See English “with”
Cognates English: whip
Old English: wiþþe
Noun
wiþþe f
tie, band
From Proto-Germanic *wiþjǭ, *wiþiz (“rope, cord”)
from Proto-Indo-European *weyt- (“something twisted, rod, switch, whip”)
from *wey- (“to wind, twist, bend, turn”)
Ancient Greek ἰτέα (itéa, “willow”)
Latin vītis (“vine”)
Old Irish féith (“fibre”)
—————————————————————-
Adverb
επίσης
also, as well, too, likewise
επί πλέον
moreover, furthermore, also, over and above
Adverb επίσης • (epísis) also, too, likewise Καληνύχτα! — Επίσης! Kalinýchta! — Epísis! Goodnight! — Likewise! (a reply to return good wishes)
also (adv., conj.)
Old English eallswa “just as, even as, as if, so as, likewise,”
contraction of eal swa, from all “altogether” + so.
Originally an emphatic form of so.
The sense of “wholly so” weakened to “in addition to, in the same way,” replacing eke.
Used in Old English to introduce a sequel to a preceding statement, “and so, then, therefore.”
Used from c. 1200 in connecting sentences, “in addition, moreover.” The compound has parallel forms in German also, Dutch alzoo. English as is a shortened form of it.
έτσι
SO - THUS
thus
adverb
as a result or consequence of this; therefore.
in the manner now being indicated or exemplified; in this way.
Adverb
έτσι
so, thus
λοιπόν
then, so, now
ούτω
so, sic
Conjunction
ώστε
that, so
επομένως
so
όθεν
ergo, so
————————————————————
So
As a word confirming a previous statement
late Old English; also from late Old English as an intensive in an affirmative clause (such as so very “exceedingly, extremely”)
————————————————————
Adverb
έτσι • (étsi)
thus; like this; like that.
(colloquial) for no reason or for no money
Noun
έτσι • (étsi) (indeclinable)
(colloquial) (always with article) indicates a known person
————————————————————
so (adv.)
Old English swa, swæ (adv., conj., pron.)
“in this way,”
also “to that extent; so as, consequently, therefore,”
from Proto-Germanic *swa
Old Saxon, Middle Dutch, Old High German so, Old Norse sva, Danish saa, Swedish så, Old Frisian sa, Dutch zo, German so "so," Gothic swa "as"
from PIE reflexive pronominal stem *swo- “so”
source also of Greek hos “as,”
Old Latin suad “so,” Latin se “himself”)
derivative of *s(w)e-, pronoun of the third person and reflexive (see idiom).
Old English swa frequently was strengthened by eall, and so also is contained in compounds as, also, such. The -w- was eliminated by contraction from 12c.; compare two, which underwent the same process but retained its spelling.
As a word confirming a previous statement, late Old English; also from late Old English as an intensive in an affirmative clause (such as so very “exceedingly, extremely”). As an “introductory particle” [OED] from 1590s. Used to add emphasis or contradict a negative from 1913. So in mid-20c. British slang could mean “homosexual” (adj.). So? as a term of dismissal is attested from 1886 (short for is that so?, etc.). So what as an exclamation of indifference dates from 1934. Abbreviating phrase and so on is attested from 1724. So far so good is from 1721.
———————————————————————
Derived terms
έτσι και (étsi kai, “if”)
έτσι και έτσι (étsi kai étsi), έτσι κέτσι (étsi kétsi, “so-so”)
είτε έτσι είτε αλλιώς (eíte étsi eíte alliós, “one way or another”)
έτσι κι αλλιώς (étsi ki alliós, “anyway”)
έτσι που λες! (étsi pou les!, “so you say!”)
όχι και έτσι (óchi kai étsi, “enough”)
έτσι δεν είναι; (étsi den eínai?, “Isn’t that right?”)
ώστε έτσι; (óste étsi?, “is it?”)
έτσι το ‘πα (étsi to ‘pa, “that’s how I said it!”)
μεταφέρω
εκφράζω
CONVEY - EXPRESS - METAPHOR
“act of transferring property from one person to another”
1520’s
Verb μεταφέρω • (metaphérō) to carry over, transfer to change, alter (rhetoric) to transfer a word to a new sense, use it in a changed sense, employ a metaphor
Verb
μεταφέρω • (metaféro) (imperfect μετέφερα, past μετέφερα, passive μεταφέρομαι) past: μεταφέρθηκα
transfer
Verb
μεταφέρω
transfer, convey, carry, transport, remove, relocate
μεταβιβάζω
convey, transfer, transmit, communicate, depute, devolve
μεταδίδω
transmit, impart, communicate, convey, propagate
αποδίδω
attribute, ascribe, impute, restore, give back, convey
εκχωρώ
assign, cede, convey
———————————————————-
LATIN
From Latin trānsferō (“I bear across”).
From trāns- (“beyond”) + ferō (“I bear, carry”).
Verb
transfer (third-person singular simple present transfers, present participle transferring, simple past and past participle transferred)
(transitive) To move or pass from one place, person or thing to another.
to transfer the laws of one country to another; to transfer suspicion
(transitive) To convey the impression of (something) from one surface to another.
to transfer drawings or engravings to a lithographic stone
(transport) This term needs a definition. Please help out and add a definition, then remove the text {{rfdef}}.
transfer to the Blue Line
(intransitive) To be or become transferred.
(transitive, law) To arrange for something to belong to or be officially controlled by somebody else.
The title to land is transferred by deed.
Synonyms
(move or pass from one place/person/thing to another): carry over, move, onpass
(convey impression of from one surface to another): copy, transpose
(to be or become transferred):
trānsferō (present infinitive trānsferre, perfect active trānstulī, supine trānslātum); third conjugation, irregular
I bear, carry or bring across or over; transport, transfer.
Cur non illam huc transferri iubes?
Why don’t you command her to be brought over hither?
I copy, transcribe, transfer.
I carry along in public, display in procession, bear in triumph.
I put off, defer, postpone, delay, transfer.
I translate into another language; interpret.
I transfer in meaning, use figuratively or tropically.
I apply, make use of.
I change, transform.
Prefix
trāns-
through, across, beyond
from Latin trāns (“across, on the far side, beyond”)
Prefix
trans-
Across, through, over, beyond, to or on the other side of, outside of.
(chemistry) A compound in which two atoms or groups are situated on opposite sides of some plane of symmetry passing through the compound. (Also used without the hyphen as an adjective; see trans.)
Transgender or transsexual, or pertaining to those who are transgender or transsexual.
FERRY
from Proto-Indo-European *bʰéreti (“to bear, carry”)
from the root *bʰer-
Old English beran (English bear).
Birth + Hold + Carry + Move + Travel
Old English: beran Verb beran to carry, bear to wear to sustain, support to bring forth, produce, give birth
Proto-Indo-European
Root[edit]
*bʰer- (imperfective)
to bear, carry
———————————————————-
convey (v.)
early 14c., conveien, “to go along with;” late 14c., “to carry, transport;” from Anglo-French conveier, Old French convoiier “to accompany, escort” (Modern French convoyer), from Vulgar Latin *conviare “to accompany on the way,”
Latin com “with, together” (see con-) + via “way, road”
from PIE root *wegh- “to go, move, transport in a vehicle”
Meaning “communicate by transmission” is from late 14c.
Sense of “act of transferring property from one person to another” is from 1520s.
It was a euphemism for “steal” 15c.-17c., which helped broaden its meaning. Related: Conveyed; conveying.
———————————————————
EXPRESS
From εκ (out from) + φράζω (phrase)
εκφράζω
express , passive: express , passive share: expressed
I convey something with the word, written or oral, with the body, with visual arts, etc.
I have something on my mind, but I find it difficult to express it
manifest , externalize , make manifest (a thought, an emotion)
attendees expressed their enthusiasm with warm applause
the painting expresses the pessimism of the artist at that time
I reflect , I echo someone’s views and personality in general
the views of that party member do not express the totality of its leadership
sculpture does not express me, I prefer music
render a quantity using a unit system or as a function of another quantity
Verb
φρᾰ́ζω • (phrázō)
to make known, point out, intimate, show
to tell, declare
to explain, interpret
to counsel, advise, suggest, bid, order
(middle) to think, consider, ponder, muse
(middle) to devise, plan, design, intend
(middle) to think, suppose, believe, imagine that
(middle) to remark, perceive, notice
(middle) to come to know, learn, become acquainted with, see, understand
(middle) to observe, watch, guard
(middle) to mind, heed, take care, beware of
Might be related to φρήν (phrḗn, “wits, will”).
αλλιώς
OTHERWISE
Old English: oðre wisan “in the other manner”
Old English wis “learned, sagacious, cunning; sane; prudent, discreet; experienced; having the power of discerning and judging rightly,”
Noun
wīsa m (nominative plural wīsan)
(poetic) leader, chief
Proto-Indo-European Root *h₂wes- to dwell, live, reside to stay, spend the night
From Proto-Germanic *wesaną (“to be, remain”)
Germanic: *wistiz (“essence, nature”)
Compare Latin Vesta (“goddess of the hearth”)
Sanskrit वसति (vásati, “dwell”).
Adverb
αλλιώς • (alliós)
otherwise; else; differently
Adverb
άλλως • (állos)
Alternative form of αλλιώς (alliós)
Adverb
αλλέως • (alléos)
Alternative form of αλλιώς (alliós)
Translations of otherwise
Adverb
αλλιώς
otherwise, else
αλλιώτικα
otherwise
otherwise (adv.)
contracted from Old English phrase on oðre wisan “in the other manner” (see other + wise (n.)
which in Middle English became oþre wise, and mid-14c. oþerwise.
As an adjective from c. 1400. Also in Middle English were otherwhere “elsewhere;” otherwhat “something else” (pron.).
———————————————————-
wise (adj.)
Old English wis “learned, sagacious, cunning; sane; prudent, discreet; experienced; having the power of discerning and judging rightly,” from Proto-Germanic *wissaz (source also of Old Saxon, Old Frisian wis, Old Norse viss, Dutch wijs, German weise “wise”), from past-participle adjective *wittos of PIE root *weid- “to see” (hence “to know”). Modern slang meaning “aware, cunning” first attested 1896. Related to the source of Old English witan “to know, wit.”
A wise man has no extensive knowledge; He who has extensive knowledge is not a wise man. [Lao-tzu, “Tao te Ching,” c. 550 B.C.E.]
Wise man was in Old English. Wise guy is attested from 1896, American English; wise-ass (n.) by 1966, American English (probably a literal sense is intended by the phrase in the 1607 comedy “Westward Hoe” by Dekker and Webster). Wisenheimer, with mock German or Yiddish surname suffix, first recorded 1904.
wise (n.)
“way of proceeding, manner,” Old English wise “way, fashion, custom, habit, manner; condition, state, circumstance,” from Proto-Germanic *wison “appearance, form, manner” (see wise (adj.)). Compare Old Saxon wisa, Old Frisian wis, Danish vis, Middle Dutch wise, Dutch wijs, Old High German wisa, German Weise “way, manner.” Most common in English now as a word-forming element (as in likewise, clockwise); the adverbial -wise has been used thus since Old English. For sense evolution from “to see” to “way of proceeding,” compare cognate Greek eidos “form, shape, kind,” also “course of action.” Ground sense is “to see/know the way.”
wise (v.)
Old English wisean “make wise or knowing” (transitive), cognate with Old Frisian wisa, Old Saxon wisian, Middle Dutch wisen, Dutch wijzen, Old High German wisan, German weisen; from the source of wise (adj.). Intransitive wise up is attested by 1905.
————————————————————-
*weid-
Proto-Indo-European root meaning “to see” — “to know”
It is the hypothetical source of/evidence for its existence is provided by: Sanskrit veda “I know;” Avestan vaeda “I know;” Greek oida, Doric woida “I know,” idein “to see;” Old Irish fis “vision,” find “white,” i.e. “clearly seen,” fiuss “knowledge;” Welsh gwyn, Gaulish vindos, Breton gwenn “white;” Gothic, Old Swedish, Old English witan “to know;” Gothic weitan “to see;” English wise, German wissen “to know;” Lithuanian vysti “to see;” Bulgarian vidya “I see;” Polish widzieć “to see,” wiedzieć “to know;” Russian videt’ “to see,” vest’ “news,” Old Russian vedat’ “to know.”
It forms all or part of: advice; advise; belvedere; clairvoyant; deja vu; Druid; eidetic; eidolon; envy; evident; guide; guidon; guise; guy (n.1) “small rope, chain, wire;” Gwendolyn; Hades; history; idea; ideo-; idol; idyll; improvisation; improvise; interview; invidious; kaleidoscope; -oid; penguin; polyhistor; prevision; provide; providence; prudent; purvey; purview; review; revise; Rig Veda; story (n.1) “connected account or narration of some happening;” supervise; survey; twit; unwitting; Veda; vide; view; visa; visage; vision; visit; visor; vista; voyeur; wise (adj.) “learned, sagacious, cunning;” wise (n.) “way of proceeding, manner;” wisdom; wiseacre; wit (n.) “mental capacity;” wit (v.) “to know;” witenagemot; witting; wot.
πράξη
έγγραφο
DEED
In law, “written document authenticated by seal of the person whose will it declares, especially for the purpose of conveying real estate”
“convey or transfer by deed,” 1806
——————————————————
Noun
θέσῐς • (thésis) f (genitive θέσεως); third declension
a setting, placement, arrangement
deposit
adoption (of a child)
adoption (in the more general sense of accepting as one’s own)
(philosophy) position, conclusion, thesis
(dancing) putting down the foot
(metre) the last half of the foot
(rhetoric) affirmation
(grammar) stop
——————————————————
πράξη
act, practice, transaction, action, deed, effect
έγγραφο
document, record, writing, paper, deed
έργο
work, task, opus, doing, deed
κατόρθωμα
feat, achievement, deed, tour de force
άθλος
feat, achievement, deed
συμφωνητικό
contract, agreement, deed
deed (n.)
“that which is done, acted, or performed, whether good or bad, great or small,”
Old English dæd “a doing, act, action; transaction, event,”
from Proto-Germanic *dethi- source also of Old Saxon dad, Old Norse dað, Old Frisian dede, Middle Dutch daet, Dutch daad, Old High German tat, German Tat "deed, thing done," Gothic gadeþs "a putting, placing")
from PIE *dheti- “thing laid down or done; law; deed” (source also of Lithuanian dėtis “load, burden,”
Greek thesis “a placing, setting”
suffixed form of root *dhe- “to set, place, put” (compare do).
In law, “written document authenticated by seal of the person whose will it declares, especially for the purpose of conveying real estate” is from early 14c.
As a verb, “convey or transfer by deed,” 1806, American English. Related: Deeded; deeding.
μεταξὺ
MEANTIME (in the meantime)
From μετα (with, among, after, change) + σύν (together, with)
μεταξὺ
meantime
Adv
μεταξύ Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: metaxu Phonetic Spelling: (met-ax-oo') Definition: between, after Usage: meanwhile, afterwards, between.
between, meanwhile
From meta and a form of sun; betwixt (of place or person); (of time) as adjective, intervening, or (by implication) adjoining – between, mean while, next.
μεταξύ Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: metaxu Phonetic Spelling: (met-ax-oo') Definition: between, after Usage: meanwhile, afterwards, between.
Word Origin
from meta and xun (see sun)
μετά Part of Speech: Preposition Transliteration: meta Phonetic Spelling: (met-ah') Definition: with, among, after Usage: (a) gen: with, in company with, (b) acc: (1) behind, beyond, after, of place, (2) after, of time, with nouns, neut. of adjectives.
3326 metá (a preposition) – properly, with (“after with”), implying “change afterward” (i.e. what results after the activity). As an active “with,” 3326 (metá) looks towards the after-effect (change, result) which is only defined by the context.
[3326 (metá) before a vowel is written met (meth).]
σύν Part of Speech: Preposition Transliteration: sun Phonetic Spelling: (soon) Definition: with, together with (expresses association with) Usage: with. HELPS Word-studies 4862 sýn (a primitive preposition, having no known etymology) – properly, identified with, joined close-together in tight identification; with (= closely identified together).
συμφωνία
συμφωνώς προς
σύμφωνα με
ACCORDINGLY - IN ACCORDANCE WITH
from σῠν- (“with, together”) + φωνή (“sound”).
συμφωνώς προς
in accordance with, accordingly
Adjective
σῠ́μφωνος • (súmphōnos) m or f (neuter σῠ́μφωνον); second declension
agreeing in sound, harmonious
From σῠν- (“with, together”) + φωνή (“sound, tone”) + -ος (action noun or adjective).
Noun σῠμφωνῐ́ᾱ • (sumphōníā) f (genitive σῠμφωνῐ́ᾱς); first declension agreement in sound, symphony (music) accord, concord (e.g. octave) numerous sounds played together, a concert of vocal or instrumental (or both) music music band, orchestra type of musical instrument harmony, agreement, accord
From σῠ́μφωνος (“agreeing in sound, harmonious”) + -ῐ́ᾱ (abstract noun)
from σῠν- (“with, together”) + φωνή (“sound”).
επομένως
NEXT - FOLLOWING - THEREFORE - CONSEQUENTLY
Adjective
επόμενος • (epómenos) m (feminine επόμενη, neuter επόμενο)
next, following
Adverb
επομένως • (epoménos)
consequently, therefore, accordingly
Ο πρόεδρος αρρώστησε· επομένως, δεν θα πραγματοποιηθεί η συνεδρίαση.
O próedros arróstise; epoménos, den tha pragmatopoiitheí i synedríasi.
The president fell ill; consequently, the meeting will not take place.
αναλόγως
κατ’ αναλογία
CONSIDERING - ACCORDINGLY
κατ’ αναλογία (by analogy)
Etymology
accordingly ( katharevousa ) analogously
medieval Greek accordingly and depending
ancient Greek accordingly
Adverb
considering
accordingly , seeing and doing
I can not commit, I will move according to how the child will go to the Panhellenic Games, because if he does not go to Athens ….
by analogy , in a manner proportional to sizes
κατ’ αναλογία, με τρόπο ανάλογο προς μεγέθη
by analogy , in a manner proportional to sizes
Ο φόρος πρέπει να υπολογίζεται αναλόγως με το πραγματικό εισόδημα καθενός (να είναι ανάλογος προς αυτόν)
The tax should be calculated according to the real income of each (to be proportional to him)
Ἔτι
STILL - YET - EVEN NOW
Ἔτι
yet
Adv
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition.
2089 éti (an adverb) – properly, continue (remain).
ἤδη
ALREADY (already went, already gone, already came)
adverb of time
ἤδη
already
Adv
édé: already Original Word: ἤδη Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: édé Phonetic Spelling: (ay'-day) Definition: already Usage: already; now at length, now after all this waiting.
2235 ḗdē (a temporal adverb) – already now, even now, referring to what is not yet strictly present but already (now) impacts the present (= “already now”).
[2235 (ḗdē) is “a point of time preceding another point of time and implying completion – ‘already’” (L & N, 1, 67.20). It often factors in something strictly future, but can include anything that is not strictly present.]
ἐν
DURING
ἐν
during
Prep
ἐν Part of Speech: Preposition Transliteration: en Phonetic Spelling: (en) Definition: in, on, at, by, with Usage: in, on, among.
1722 en (a preposition) – properly, in (inside, within); (figuratively) “in the realm (sphere) of,” as in the condition (state) in which something operates from the inside (within).
εἰς
INTO
eis: to or into (indicating the point reached or entered, of place, time, fig. purpose, result)
Original Word: εἰς
Part of Speech: Preposition
Transliteration: eis
Phonetic Spelling: (ice)
Definition: to or into (indicating the point reached or entered, of place, time, purpose, result)
Usage: into, in, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among.
HELPS Word-studies
1519 eis (a preposition) – properly, into (unto) – literally, “motion into which” implying penetration (“unto,” “union”) to a particular purpose or result.
οὖν
THEREFORE - (“SO THEN”)
οὖν
therefore
Conj
Strong’s Concordance
oun: therefore, then, (and) so
Original Word: οὖν Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: oun Phonetic Spelling: (oon) Definition: therefore, then, (and) so Usage: therefore, then.
3767 oún (a conjunction) – therefore, now then, accordingly so. 3767 (oún) occurs 526 times in the NT and is typically translated “therefore” which means, “By extension, here’s how the dots connect.”
ἥ
WHICH
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that
also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
ἢ
OR - THAN
ἢ (not to be confused with) ἥ
ἢ - ἥ
ἢ
Or
Conj
é: or, than
Original Word: ἤ Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle Transliteration: é Phonetic Spelling: (ay) Definition: or, than Usage: or, than.
and, but, either, rather
A primary particle of distinction between two connected terms; disjunctive, or; comparative, than – and, but (either), (n-)either, except it be, (n-)or (else), rather, save, than, that, what, yea. Often used in connection with other particles. Compare especially ede, eper, etoi.
see GREEK ede
see GREEK eper
see GREEK etoi
ἣν
THAT
From ὅς (who,which, that)
ἣν
that
RelPro-AFS
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
μέντοι
HOWEVER - TRUE, THEREFORE…
μέντοι
however
Conj
mentoi: yet, however Original Word: μέντοι Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: mentoi Phonetic Spelling: (men'-toy) Definition: yet, however Usage: (a) indeed, really, (b) yet, however, nevertheless.
μέν: truly, indeed
Original Word: μέν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: men
Phonetic Spelling: (men)
Definition: shows affirmation or concession
Usage: an untranslatable particle, generally answered by de, each of the two introducing a clause intended to be contrasted with the other.
3303 mén (a conjunction) – indeed, verily (truly).
τοί - toi: an enclitic particle of asseveration used as a prefix or suff. in the N.T.
τοί
Indeed-consequently (often translated therefore, thereupon, whereupon).
Original Word: τοί
Transliteration: toi
Phonetic Spelling: (toy)
Definition: an enclitic particle of asseveration used as a prefix or suff. in the N.T
5104 toí – indeed-consequently (often translated therefore, thereupon, whereupon). “In the NT, 5102 (títlos) is only used in composition” (Zodhiates, Dictionary), i.e. in a compound term like 2544 (kaítoige) or 5106 (toínyn).
μέντοι
YET SURELY, HOWEVER
μέντοι
however
Conj
μέντοι Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: mentoi Phonetic Spelling: (men'-toy) Definition: yet, however Usage: (a) indeed, really, (b) yet, however, nevertheless.
μέν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: men
Phonetic Spelling: (men)
Definition: shows affirmation or concession
Usage: an untranslatable particle, generally answered by de, each of the two introducing a clause intended to be contrasted with the other.
3303 mén (a conjunction) – indeed, verily (truly).
μέν, a weakened form of μήν, and hence, properly a particle of affirmation: truly, certainly, surely, indeed
—————————————————
toi: an enclitic particle of asseveration used as a prefix or suff. in the N.T.
Original Word: τοί
Transliteration: toi
Phonetic Spelling: (toy)
Definition: an enclitic particle of asseveration used as a prefix or suff. in the N.T
5104 toí – indeed-consequently (often translated therefore, thereupon, whereupon).
“In the NT, 5102 (títlos) is only used in composition” (Zodhiates, Dictionary), i.e. in a compound term like 2544 (kaítoige) or 5106 (toínyn).
καίτοιγε Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: kaitoige Phonetic Spelling: (kah'-ee-toyg-eh) Definition: and yet, indeed Usage: and yet, although, indeed. HELPS Word-studies 2544 kaítoige (from 2543 /kaítoi, "even so, indeed" and 1065 /gé, "indeed, really") – although – literally, "even so indeed" (= really!).
from kaitoi and ge
γε
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: ge
Phonetic Spelling: (gheh)
Definition: emphasizes the word to which it is joined
Usage: an enclitic, emphasizing particle: at least, indeed, really, but generally too subtle to be represented in English.
HELPS Word-studies
1065 gé – an emphatic particle meaning at least, indeed. 1065 (gé) adds the idea “assuredly (really)” which stresses the salient part of a comparison (a two-part statement). 1065 (gé) emphasizes “the key idea/word that follows it” (R, 1148; Bäumlein, 54).
καίτοι Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: kaitoi Phonetic Spelling: (kah'-ee-toy) Definition: and yet Usage: and yet, although, though. HELPS Word-studies 2543 kaítoi (a compound particle from 2532 /kaí, "and, even" and 5104 /toí, "indeed") – even yet, though indeed. 2543 (kaítoi) focuses on the first part of a comparison.
ὅσα
WHATEVER
ὅσα*
whatever
RelPro-ANP
Strong’s Concordance
hosos: how much, how many
Original Word: ὅσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Pronoun Transliteration: hosos Phonetic Spelling: (hos'-os) Definition: how much, how many Usage: how much, how great, how many, as great as, as much.
———————————————————— From ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
κάθε
EVERY TIME - ONE BY ONE
ἕν καθ’ ἕν (hén kath’ hén, “one by one”)
καθ’ εἷς (kath’ heîs, “one by one, one after another”)
Derived terms κάθε άλλο (káthe állo, “far from it”) κάθε μέρα (káthe méra, “every day”) κάθε πόσο (káthe póso, “how often”) κάθε πότε (káthe póte, “how often”) κάθε που (káthe pou, “whenever”) κάθε τόσο (káthe tóso, “every so often”) κάθε φορά (káthe forá, “every time”)
See also
καθένας (kathénas, “every one”)
καθετί (kathetí, “everything”)
κανένας (kanénas, “no-one, nobody”)
—————————————————————
Etymology
From Byzantine Greek καθέν (kathén), neuter form of καθείς (katheís), from Ancient Greek καθ’ εἷς (kath’ heîs, “one by one, one after another”), from ἕν καθ’ ἕν (hén kath’ hén, “one by one”).
Determiner κάθε • (káthe) (indeclinable) (individual): every, each κάθε υποψήφιος καλείται να … káthe ypopsífios kaleítai na … each candidate is required to … (whatever): any με κάθε τίμημα me káthe tímima at any price (repetition): every, each δουλεύει κάθε σαββατοκύριακο doulévei káthe savvatokýriako he works every weekend (derοgatory): any κάθε ανόητος μπορεί να … káthe anóitos boreí na … any fool can …
Derived terms κάθε άλλο (káthe állo, “far from it”) κάθε μέρα (káthe méra, “every day”) κάθε πόσο (káthe póso, “how often”) κάθε πότε (káthe póte, “how often”) κάθε που (káthe pou, “whenever”) κάθε τόσο (káthe tóso, “every so often”) κάθε φορά (káthe forá, “every time”)
See also
καθένας (kathénas, “every one”)
καθετί (kathetí, “everything”)
κανένας (kanénas, “no-one, nobody”)
μου έρχεται
It comes to me, I get the urge
πάλιν
AGAIN
palin: back (of place), again (of time), further
Original Word: πάλιν
Part of Speech: Adverb
Transliteration: palin
Phonetic Spelling: (pal’-in)
Definition: back (of place), again (of time), further
Usage: again, back, once more, further, on the other hand.
ὅπου
WHERE (from whence to where) - (what where?)
From ὅς (which, what, that) + πού (where, somewhere)
In which place, where; α. in relative sentences with the indicative it is used to refer to a preceding noun of place.
To be mentally supplied in what precedes or follows.
hopou: where
Original Word: ὅπου Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: hopou Phonetic Spelling: (hop'-oo) Definition: where Usage: where, whither, in what place.
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
pou: somewhere
Original Word: πού Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: pou Phonetic Spelling: (poo) Definition: somewhere Usage: where, somewhere, anywhere; with numerals: somewhere about.
μέλλω
HE WAS ABOUT TO (to be about to)
Strong’s Concordance
melló: to be about to
Original Word: μέλλω Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: melló Phonetic Spelling: (mel'-lo) Definition: to be about to Usage: I intend, am about to; I delay, linger. HELPS Word-studies 3195 méllō – properly, at the very point of acting; ready, "about to happen." 3195 (méllō) is used "in general of what is sure to happen" (J. Thayer).
Concordance Entries
Strong’s Greek 3195
110 Occurrences
ἤμελλεν — 11 Occ. ἤμελλον — 1 Occ. ἔμελλεν — 3 Occ. ἔμελλον — 3 Occ. μέλλῃ — 3 Occ. μελλήσετε — 1 Occ. μελλήσω — 1 Occ. μέλλει — 16 Occ. μέλλειν — 6 Occ. μέλλεις — 4 Occ. μέλλετε — 2 Occ. μέλλω — 2 Occ. μέλλων — 10 Occ. μέλλομεν — 1 Occ. μέλλον — 3 Occ. μέλλοντα — 6 Occ. μέλλοντας — 3 Occ. μέλλοντες — 4 Occ. μέλλοντι — 4 Occ. μελλόντων — 8 Occ. μέλλοντος — 6 Occ. μέλλουσαν — 4 Occ. μελλούσης — 6 Occ. μέλλουσιν — 2 Occ. Additional Entries μεθυσθῶσιν — 1 Occ. μέλανι — 1 Occ. μέλανος — 2 Occ. μέλαιναν — 1 Occ. μέλας — 2 Occ. Μελεά — 1 Occ. ἐμελέτησαν — 1 Occ. μελέτα — 1 Occ. μέλι — 4 Occ. Μελίτη — 1 Occ. ἤμελλον — 1 Occ. ἔμελλεν — 3 Occ. ἔμελλον — 3 Occ. μέλλῃ — 3 Occ. μελλήσετε — 1 Occ. μελλήσω — 1 Occ. μέλλει — 16 Occ. μέλλειν — 6 Occ. μέλλεις — 4 Occ. μέλλετε — 2 Occ.
ἔτι
STILL - YET
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition. HELPS Word-studies 2089 éti (an adverb) – properly, continue (remain).
ἔτῐ
YET - STILL - MOREOVER -FURTHER
Adverb ἔτῐ • (éti) (of time) yet, still (of the present) (of the past, mostly with imperfect) (of the future) (with a negative) no more, no longer (of degree) yet, still, besides, further, moreover (often to strengthen a comparative) (with the positive)
Derived terms
μηκέτι (mēkéti)
οὐκέτι (oukéti)
ὡς
AS - LIKE AS - EVEN AS - AS LONG AS
as, like as, even as, when, since, as long as
as, like as, about, as it were, according as, how, when, while, as soon as, so that.
as, like as, even as, when, since, as long as
ὡς
Part of Speech: Adverb
Transliteration: hós
Phonetic Spelling: (hoce)
Definition: as, like as, even as, when, since, as long as
Usage: as, like as, about, as it were, according as, how, when, while, as soon as, so that.
From ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that
Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
ὡς
WHEN - HOW - WHERE - SO THAT - JUST AS - FROM THERE
PIE *yós Pronoun *yós or *Hyós that, who, which (relative)
From the relative pronoun ὅς (hós) + -ως (-ōs, adverbial suffix)
Adverb ὡς • (hōs) (relative adverb) the introduction to similes like as, as, just as according as
(with adverbial clauses)
(parenthetically) to qualify a general statement; as it seems
(in elliptical phrases) so far as….
(attached to the object of a verb) as
(to limit or augment the force of adverbs)
Conjunction
ὡς • (hōs)
(subordinating conjunction or complementizer, introducing dependent or subordinate clause)
(with noun clauses) introducing a clause expressing a fact: that (with indicative or optative)
(final) introducing a clause expressing an end or purpose: that, so that, in order that, so (with subjunctive or optative)
(consequential) introducing a clause expressing a result: so that
(causal) as, since, because
(temporal) when
(modal) how
(local) where
ἔγωγε
FOR MY PART
Pronoun
ἔγωγε • (égōge) (Attic)
I at least, I for my part
(in answer to a yes-no question) yes, I do, I did, etc.; (with negative) no, I don’t, I didn’t, etc.
γε
AT LEAST - ONLY - AT ANY RATE - IN FACT - IN ANY CASE
Particle
γε • (ge) (discourse particle)
often translatable with italics or stress
(limiting) at least, at any rate, only
(intensifying) in fact
————————————————————-
γᾰ́ρ
Etymology
From γε (ge) + ᾰ̓́ρᾰ (ára).
Conjunction
γᾰ́ρ • (gár)
(“for, since”)
γε • (ge) (discourse particle)
often translatable with italics are or stress
(limiting) at least, at any rate, only
(intensifying) in fact
Conjunction
ᾰ̓́ρᾰ • (ára)
(“so, then, therefore, consequently”)
———————————————————-
386 BCE – 367 BCE, Plato, Meno 80e:
Σωκράτης οὔτε γὰρ ἂν [ὅ γε οἶδεν] ζητοῖ—οἶδεν γάρ, καὶ οὐδὲν δεῖ [τῷ γε τοιούτῳ] ζητήσεως.
Sōkrátēs oúte gàr àn [hó ge oîden] zētoî—oîden gár, kaì oudèn deî [tôi ge toioútōi] zētḗseōs.
Socrates: For he can neither inquire into [what he knows] — since he knows it, and [in a case like that] there is no need for inquiry.
Because δέ (dé) must always follow the first word in a clause, γε always follows δέ when it modifies the first phrase in the clause.
366 BCE – 348 BCE, Plato, Theaetetus 164a:
Σωκράτης [ὁ δέ γε ὁρῶν] καὶ ἐπιστήμων γεγονὼς οὗ ἑώρα, ἐὰν μύσῃ, μέμνηται μέν, οὐχ ὁρᾷ δὲ αὐτό.
Sōkrátēs [ho dé ge horôn] kaì epistḗmōn gegonṑs hoû heṓra, eàn músēi, mémnētai mén, oukh horâi dè autó.
Socrates: [But the one who sees] and has become knowledgeable about what he saw, if he closes his eyes, he still remembers it, though he no longer sees it.
ἔγωγε
ἔγωγ’
ἐγώνγα
ἰώνγα
AT LEAST FOR MY PART
An emphatic form of ἐγώ (“I”) formed by adding γε (intensifier).
Pronoun
ἔγωγε • (égōge) (Attic)
I at least, I for my part
(in answer to a yes-no question) yes, I do, I did, etc.; (with negative) no, I don’t, I didn’t, etc.
ἔγωγε • (égōge) (Attic)
ἔγωγ’ (égōg’) – apocopic
ἐγώνγα (egṓnga) – Doric
ἰώνγα (iṓnga), ἰώνει (iṓnei), ἰώγα (iṓga) – Boeotian
γᾰ́ρ
γε + ᾰ̓́ρᾰ
FOR - SINCE
From γε (at least, in fact) + ᾰ̓́ρᾰ (consequently, therefore)
γᾰ́ρ
Etymology
Conjunction
γᾰ́ρ • (gár)
(“for, since”)
γε • (ge) (discourse particle)
often translatable with italics are or stress
(limiting) at least, at any rate, only
(intensifying) in fact
Conjunction
ᾰ̓́ρᾰ • (ára)
(“so, then, therefore, consequently”)
ᾰ̓́ρᾰ
CONSEQUENTLY - THEREFORE
Conjunction
ᾰ̓́ρᾰ • (ára)
so, then, therefore, consequently
From Proto-Indo-European *h₂er-
Proto-Indo-European
Root
*h₂er-
to fit, to fix, to put together
From Latin: ordō
Noun
ōrdō m (genitive ōrdinis); third declension
a methodical series, arrangement, or order; regular line, row, or series
a class, station, condition, rank
a group (of people) of the same class, caste, station, or rank (“vir senatorii ordinis”)
(military) A rank or line of soldiers; band, troop, company
(military) command, captaincy, generalship
From Latin: ars Noun ars f (genitive artis); third declension art skill, craft, handicraft, trade, power
From Proto-Indo-European *h₂r̥tís (“fitting”)
from the root *h₂er- (“to join”).
From Ancient Greek: ἀρθμός (arthmós)
Noun
ἀρθμός • (arthmós) m (genitive ἀρθμοῦ); second declension
bond, league, friendship
Noun
ᾰ̓́ρθρον • (árthron) n (genitive ᾰ̓́ρθρου); second declension
(anatomy) joint
Synonym: ἅψος (hápsos)
(anatomy) limb
articulation
ἄρθρον τῆς φωνῆς ( árthron tês phōnês ) – vocal articulation
(grammar) connecting word
(grammar) an article: a category including the definite article ὁ (ho) and the basic relative pronoun ὅς (hós)
from Proto-Indo-European *-dʰrom Proto-Indo-European: *-trom Alternative forms *-dʰlom, *-tlom, *-trom Suffix *-dʰrom n Alternative form of *-trom
Suffix
*(é)-trom n
Forms nouns denoting a tool or instrument.
Noun άρθρο • (árthro) n (plural άρθρα) (grammar) article οριστικό άρθρο ― oristikó árthro ― definite article (journalism) article
κύριο άρθρο ― kýrio árthro ― lead story article of a charter, law, contract etc.
άρθρο πίστεως ― árthro písteos ― article of faith
(grammar): οριστικό άρθρο n (oristikó árthro, “definite article”)
(grammar): αόριστο άρθρο n (aóristo árthro, “indefinite article”)
(journalism): κύριο άρθρο n (kýrio árthro, “leading article”)
άρθρο πίστεως n (árthro písteos, “article of faith”)
———————————————-
ARTICLE
From Middle English article, from Old French article,
from Latin articulus (“a joint, limb, member, part, division, the article in grammar, a point of time”),
from Latin artus
from Proto-Indo-European *h₂értus (“that which is fit together; juncture, ordering”),
from the root *h₂er- (“to join, fit (together)”).
Latin: artus
Adjective
artus (feminine arta, neuter artum, comparative artior, superlative artissimus); first/second-declension adjective
narrow, close, fitted, confined, dense
(figuratively) severe, strict, scanty, brief
From Proto-Indo-European *h₂r̥tós (“fitted”), from the root *h₂er- (“to join, fit (together)”). Cognates include Sanskrit ऋत (ṛtá, “order; right, etc.”) and Avestan 𐬀𐬴𐬀 (aṣ̌a, “truth”).
Noun
English Wikipedia has an article on:
Article (publishing)
English Wikipedia has an article on:
Article (grammar)
article (plural articles)
A piece of nonfictional writing such as a story, report, opinion piece, or entry in a newspaper, magazine, journal, dictionary, encyclopedia, etc.
An object, a member of a group or class.
an article of clothing
a sales article
(grammar) A part of speech that indicates, specifies and limits a noun (a, an, or the in English). In some languages the article may appear as an ending (e.g. definite article in Swedish) or there may be none (e.g. Russian, Pashto).
A section of a legal document, bylaws, etc. or, in the plural, the entire document seen as a collection of these.
The Articles of War are a set of regulations […] to govern the conduct of […] military […] forces
A genuine article.
A part or segment of something joined to other parts, or, in combination, forming a structured set.
Each of the chelicerae is composed of two articles, forming a powerful pincer.
(derogatory, dated) A person; an individual.
a shrewd article
(archaic) A wench.
She’s a prime article (whip slang), she’s a devilish good piece, a hell of a goer.
(dated) Subject matter; concern.
(dated) A distinct part.
(obsolete) A precise point in time; a moment.
άρθρο
ARTICLE
Conjunction
ᾰ̓́ρᾰ • (ára)
so, then, therefore, consequently
From Proto-Indo-European *h₂er-
Proto-Indo-European
Root
*h₂er-
to fit, to fix, to put together
From Latin: ordō
Noun
ōrdō m (genitive ōrdinis); third declension
a methodical series, arrangement, or order; regular line, row, or series
a class, station, condition, rank
a group (of people) of the same class, caste, station, or rank (“vir senatorii ordinis”)
(military) A rank or line of soldiers; band, troop, company
(military) command, captaincy, generalship
From Latin: ars Noun ars f (genitive artis); third declension art skill, craft, handicraft, trade, power
From Proto-Indo-European *h₂r̥tís (“fitting”)
from the root *h₂er- (“to join”).
From Ancient Greek: ἀρθμός (arthmós)
Noun
ἀρθμός • (arthmós) m (genitive ἀρθμοῦ); second declension
bond, league, friendship
Noun
ᾰ̓́ρθρον • (árthron) n (genitive ᾰ̓́ρθρου); second declension
(anatomy) joint
Synonym: ἅψος (hápsos)
(anatomy) limb
articulation
ἄρθρον τῆς φωνῆς ( árthron tês phōnês ) – vocal articulation
(grammar) connecting word
(grammar) an article: a category including the definite article ὁ (ho) and the basic relative pronoun ὅς (hós)
from Proto-Indo-European *-dʰrom Proto-Indo-European: *-trom Alternative forms *-dʰlom, *-tlom, *-trom Suffix *-dʰrom n Alternative form of *-trom
Suffix
*(é)-trom n
Forms nouns denoting a tool or instrument.
Noun άρθρο • (árthro) n (plural άρθρα) (grammar) article οριστικό άρθρο ― oristikó árthro ― definite article (journalism) article
κύριο άρθρο ― kýrio árthro ― lead story article of a charter, law, contract etc.
άρθρο πίστεως ― árthro písteos ― article of faith
(grammar): οριστικό άρθρο n (oristikó árthro, “definite article”)
(grammar): αόριστο άρθρο n (aóristo árthro, “indefinite article”)
(journalism): κύριο άρθρο n (kýrio árthro, “leading article”)
άρθρο πίστεως n (árthro písteos, “article of faith”)
———————————————-
ARTICLE
From Middle English article, from Old French article,
from Latin articulus (“a joint, limb, member, part, division, the article in grammar, a point of time”),
from Latin artus
from Proto-Indo-European *h₂értus (“that which is fit together; juncture, ordering”),
from the root *h₂er- (“to join, fit (together)”).
Latin: artus
Adjective
artus (feminine arta, neuter artum, comparative artior, superlative artissimus); first/second-declension adjective
narrow, close, fitted, confined, dense
(figuratively) severe, strict, scanty, brief
From Proto-Indo-European *h₂r̥tós (“fitted”), from the root *h₂er- (“to join, fit (together)”). Cognates include Sanskrit ऋत (ṛtá, “order; right, etc.”) and Avestan 𐬀𐬴𐬀 (aṣ̌a, “truth”).
Noun
English Wikipedia has an article on:
Article (publishing)
English Wikipedia has an article on:
Article (grammar)
article (plural articles)
A piece of nonfictional writing such as a story, report, opinion piece, or entry in a newspaper, magazine, journal, dictionary, encyclopedia, etc.
An object, a member of a group or class.
an article of clothing
a sales article
(grammar) A part of speech that indicates, specifies and limits a noun (a, an, or the in English). In some languages the article may appear as an ending (e.g. definite article in Swedish) or there may be none (e.g. Russian, Pashto).
A section of a legal document, bylaws, etc. or, in the plural, the entire document seen as a collection of these.
The Articles of War are a set of regulations […] to govern the conduct of […] military […] forces
A genuine article.
A part or segment of something joined to other parts, or, in combination, forming a structured set.
Each of the chelicerae is composed of two articles, forming a powerful pincer.
(derogatory, dated) A person; an individual.
a shrewd article
(archaic) A wench.
She’s a prime article (whip slang), she’s a devilish good piece, a hell of a goer.
(dated) Subject matter; concern.
(dated) A distinct part.
(obsolete) A precise point in time; a moment.
διέρχεσθαι διὰ
TO PASS THROUGH - TO GO OVER TO
διέρχεσθαι
to pass
V-PNM/P
διὰ
through
Prep
πλησίον
NEAR
πλησίον
near
Prep
πάλιν
BACK AGAIN
πάλιν
again
Adv
palin: back (of place), again (of time), further
Original Word: πάλιν
Part of Speech: Adverb
Transliteration: palin
Phonetic Spelling: (pal’-in)
Definition: back (of place), again (of time), further
Usage: again, back, once more, further, on the other hand.
οὕτως
IN THIS WAY - THIS - IN THIS MANNER
οὕτως Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: houtó and houtós Phonetic Spelling: (hoo'-to) Definition: in this way, thus Usage: thus, so, in this manner. HELPS Word-studies 3779 hoútō (an adverb, derived from the demonstrative pronoun, 3778 /hoútos, "this") – like this . . .; in this manner, in this way (fashion), in accordance with this description (i.e. corresponding to what follows); in keeping with; along this line, in the manner spoken.
ἦν ἐκεῖ
WAS THERE
ἐκεῖ
there
Adv
ἐκεῖ Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: ekei Phonetic Spelling: (ek-i') Definition: there, to there Usage: (a) there, yonder, in that place, (b) thither, there.
———————————————————-
IS - WAS - WILL BE eimi: I exist, I am Original Word: εἰμί Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: eimi Phonetic Spelling: (i-mee') Definition: I exist, I am Usage: I am, exist.
ᾖ — he might be — V-PSA-3S (present subjunctive active) ἤμην — i was — V-II-1S ἦμεν — we were — V-II-1P ἤμεθα — we had been — V-II-1P (imperfect indicative) ἦν — he had been — V-II-3S ἦς — you were — V-II-2S ἦσαν — they were — V-II-3P ἦσθα — you were — V-II-2S ἦτε — y’all were — V-II-2P ἤτω — let it be! — V-PM-3S (present imperative) εἶ — if — Conj εἴη — might be — V-PO-3S (present optative) εἰμὶ — I am — V-PI-1S εἶναι — to be — V-PN (present neuter) εἰσίν — they are — V-PI-3P (present indicative) ἔσῃ — ἔσεσθαι — Ἔσεσθε — ἐσμεν — ἔσομαι — ἐσόμενον — ἐσόμεθα — ἔσονται — ἔσται — ἐστε — ἐστί — ἐστιν — ἔστω — Ἔστωσαν — ἴσθι — ὦ — ὦμεν — ὢν — ὦσιν — ὂν — ὄντα — ὄντας — ὄντες — ὄντι — ὄντων — ὄντος — οὖσα — οὖσαι — οὖσαν — οὔσῃ — οὔσης — οὖσιν — οὐσῶν —
ὧδε
THUS (what follows)
Adverb
ὧδε • (hôde)
demonstrative adverb In this manner, thus
(of a state or condition) as it is
(indicating something immediately to come) as follows
καιρός
FOR SOME TIME - MEASURE OF TIME
From κἄν (“if, even if”) + ποῖος (“what nature”)
Noun
καιρός • (kairós) m (genitive καιροῦ); second declension (Epic, Attic, Ionic, Doric, Koine)
measure; proportion; fitness
(of time): period (of time); season; time
(often in a positive sense) proper time, opportunity; prime, the right moment, the fatal spot
(loosely): God’s time
(in the plural) the times
advantage, profit
From Ancient Greek κἄν (“if, even if”) + ποῖος (“what nature”).
Pronunciation
IPA(key): /ˈka.pços/
Pronoun
κάποιος • (kápoios) m a specific indefinite pronoun and determiner
someone, somebody (substantivally; as a pronoun)
Κάποιος σε πήρε τηλέφωνο.
Kápoios se píre tiléfono.
Someone phoned you.
Κάποιος έρχεται
Kápoios érchetai
someone’s coming
Είδα κάποιον να έρχεται
Eída kápoion na érchetai
I saw someone coming.
some (adjectivally; as a determiner)
κάποιο βιβλίο ― kápoio vivlío ― some book or other
κάποια δασκάλα ― kápoia daskála ― some teacher or other
Adjective
ποῖος • (poîos) m (feminine ποίᾱ, neuter ποῖον); first/second declension
(interrogative adjective) of what kind?, of what nature?, which?, what?
From Proto-Indo-European *kʷos + -ῐος (-ios, adjective suffix). Compare the indefinite form ποιός (poiós).
κᾱ̓́ν
EVEN IF - AND IF - WHAT IF
Phrase
κᾱ̓́ν • (kā́n)
crasis of καὶ (kaì) and ᾰ̓́ν (án)
crasis of καὶ (kaì) and ᾱ̓́ν (ā́n)
Conjunction καί • (kaí) and even, also both ... and ... (when used in the construction καί ... καί ...)
Particle
ᾰ̓́ν • (án) (modal particle)
Expresses potentiality or conditionality
(only Epic, with subjunctive in main clauses) in that case and future tense
(with optative) Expresses future potentiality: would or could do or be doing
(with imperfect indicative) Expresses present or rarely past potentiality: were doing, would be doing
(with aorist indicative) Expresses past potentiality
(with past indicative) Expresses unreality
(with aorist) Past or rarely present unreality: would have done, would do
(with imperfect) Present or past unreality: would do, would be doing; would have been doing
(with pluperfect) Present or less commonly past unreality:
Derived terms ἐάν (eán), ἤν (ḗn), ᾱ̓́ν (ā́n) ἐπᾱ́ν (epā́n) ἐπειδᾱ́ν (epeidā́n) ἕως ἄν (héōs án) ὅπως ἄν (hópōs án) ὃς ἄν (hòs án) ὅταν (hótan) πρὶν ἄν (prìn án) ὡς ἄν (hōs án)
—————————————————-
CRASIS
A pair of words joined by crasis is written as a single word, with a coronis (κορωνίς)—considered as equivalent to the smooth breathing in Unicode—written over the contracted vowel (regardless of whether the second word has a smooth or rough breathing):
ἐγὼ οἶδα → ἐγᾦδα
δὴ ἡμέρα → δἠμέρα
However, π, τ, κ become φ, θ, χ before a word beginning with the rough breathing:
τὸ ἱμάτιον → θοἰμάτιον
Additionally, if the first word comprises a single vowel which has the rough breathing, the rough breathing will be written:
ὁ ἐκ → οὑκ
The accent of the second word is always used, and does not change if the vowel becomes long:
τὰ ἄλλᾰ → τᾱ̓́λλᾰ (not **τἆλλᾰ)
If the first vowel is a diphthong, it loses its final element:
σοι ἐστί → σοὐστί
Before α, the final vowel of the article or τοί (or its compounds) is dropped, and α is lengthened instead of contracting normally:
ὁ ἀνήρ → ᾱ̔νήρ (not **ὡνήρ)
τοὶ ἄρα → τᾱ̓́ρα (not **τὤρα)
μέντοι ἄν → μεντᾱ̓́ν (not **μεντὤν)
τοῦ αὐτοῦ → ταὐτοῦ
καί (kaí) usually loses its final vowel except before ε ει, ο:
καὶ οὐ → κοὐ (not **κὠ)
καὶ ἡ → χἠ (not **χᾱ̓)
καὶ ἐν → κᾱ̓ν
καὶ εἶτα → κᾆτα
καὶ ὅτε → χὤτε
ἐᾱ́ν
IF - IF/THEN - IF MAYBE - POSSIBLY IF
Conjunction
ἐᾱ́ν • (eā́n)
if (for more depth see εἰ (ei) and ἄν (án)
Etymology
Univerbation of εἰ (ei, “if”) and ἄν (án, subjunctive particle)
Conjunction
εἰ • (ei)
if
ἐπεί
IF ON — SINCE WHEN - SINCE - AFTER THAT
Conjunction
ἐπεί • (epeí)
(of time) after, after that, since, when
From ἐπί (epí, “on”) + εἰ (ei, “if”).
ἐπειδή
SINCE AFTER WHAT?! - SINCE WHEN!
Etymology
From ἐπεί (epeí, “after, since”) + δή (dḗ, “emphatic particle”)
Conjunction
ἐπειδή • (epeidḗ)
(strengthened form of ἐπεί (epeí)) after, since
ἐπεί • (epeí)
(of time) after, after that, since, when
Particle δή • (dḗ) (discourse particle) Adds temporal specificity: now, already Adds emphasis: truly, ! Adds specificity: exactly With pronouns: of all people
Conjunction
δή • (dḗ)
but, and
δαί
BUT WHAT EXACTLY?! WHAT ARE YOU ASKING?
WHATEVER - YEAH,I ALREADY KNOW - WHO CARES
δαί (daí) – after interrogatives, to express wonder or curiosity
Particle
δαί • (daí) (discourse particle)
Alternative form of δή (dḗ)
Particle δή • (dḗ) (discourse particle) Adds temporal specificity: now, already Adds emphasis: truly, ! Adds specificity: exactly With pronouns: of all people
Conjunction
δή • (dḗ)
but, and
Proto-Indo-European
Particle
*de ~ *do or *-de ~ *-do
Emphatic or contrastive particle, and, but
Postpositive demonstrative particle, towards
Classical Syriac
Particle
ܕܝܢ • (den)
indicates a shift in topic, sometimes translated as: but, and, now, however but often left untranslated.
————————————————————-
Macedonian
Etymology
Borrowed from Ancient Greek δή (dḗ).
Particle
де • (de)
A particle expressing nonchalance, used to emphasize that something is irrelevant, already known, or expected.
- Си купив нови очила.
- Знам де, ми се пофали веќе.
- I have bought new glasses.
- I know, you already boasted to me about it earlier.
- Кога ќе ги сретнеме пак, ќе им се пожалиме.
- Да де.
- When we meet them again, we’ll complain to them.
- Yes, I know.
Само се сопнав де - не е дека скршив нешто.
― I just tripped - it’s not as if I fractured something.
επίσης
LIKEWISE
επίσης
also, as well, too, likewise
παρομοίως
similarly, likewise, in the same way
όμοιος
likewise
Etymology
Univerbation of the Ancient Greek phrase ἐπ’ ἴσης (ep’ ísēs), from ἐπί (epí) and ἴσης (ísēs).
Adverb
επίσης • (epísis)
also, too, likewise
Καληνύχτα! — Επίσης!
Kalinýchta! — Epísis!
Goodnight! — Likewise!
(a reply to return good wishes)
Adjective
ῐ̓́σης • (ísēs)
feminine genitive singular of ῐ̓́σος (ísos)
Adjective
ῐ̓́σος • (ísos) m (feminine ῐ̓́ση, neuter ῐ̓́σον); first/second declension
(of size, strength, or number) equal (to), equivalent (to), the same as [+dative = something, someone]
(of appearance) like [+dative = something, someone]
(with implied reference point) like, similar
(with pronoun) like someone’s x
repeated to denote relationship between equal persons or things
ἴσα πρὸς ἴσα
ísa pròs ísa
tit for tat
(not comparable, mathematics) equal to [+dative = a number]; (in the plural) equal (to each other)
(not comparable, geometry, of lines) of equal length; (of shapes) congruent; of equal area
just, fair
(comparable, politics) equal in rights, based on equality of rights
(of persons) impartial
neuter plural τὰ ἴσα (tà ísa) as substantive: equal rights, equality
(rare) adequate
(of land) even, level, flat
neuter singular (τὸ) ἴσον ((tò) íson) as substantive: level ground
εἰς τὸ ἴσον
eis tò íson
(on)to level ground
ὡς ἰσαίτατα (hōs isaítata): as equally as possible
ὡς ἰσαίτατα
AS EQUALLY AS POSSIBLE
ὡς ἰσαίτατα (hōs isaítata): as equally as possible
ἰσόθεος
GODLIKE
From ἴσος (“equal”) + θεός (“god”)
Adjective
ἰσόθεος • (isótheos) m or f (neuter ἰσόθεον); second declension
equal to the gods; godlike
ἴσος (ísos, “equal”) + θεός (theós, “god”)
ἰσοκράτος
ἰσοκρᾰτής
EQUAL POWER
Etymology
From ἰσοκρᾰτής (isokratḗs, “of equal power”)
from ἴσος (ísos) + κράτος (krátos) + -ης (-ēs).
ἰσοδίαιτος
διαιτάω
EQUAL FOOTING
From ἴσος (equal) + δίαιτα (prescribed manner of life)
From δια- (across) + *αἰτάω (ask, request, beseech, petition, pray)
Etymology
ἴσος (equal) + δίαιτα (díaita)
Adjective
ἰσοδίαιτος • (isodíaitos) m or f (neuter ἰσοδίαιτον); second declension
living on an equal footing
Etymology
From διαιτάω (diaitáō, “I treat, handle”).
Noun
δῐ́αιτᾰ • (díaita) f (genitive δῐαίτης); first declension
way of living, way of life, mode of life, lifestyle
accommodation, residence
dwelling, abode
refuge, retreat, lair of an animal
a room (separate part of a building, enclosed by walls, a floor, and a ceiling)
(medicine) prescribed manner of life, health regimen
state, condition, situation
sustenance, food
(at Athens and elsewhere) arbitration
the office of arbiter
discussion, investigation, enquiry, research
Verb
διαιτάω • (diaitáō)
to treat (handle, deal with or behave towards in a specific way)
(in the mediopassive) to lead one’s life, live
to arbitrate, regulate
to reconcile
δια- (dia-) + αἰτάω (aitáō), frequentative of αἴνυμαι (aínumai, “to take”); compare αἰτέω (aitéō, “to ask for”)
From διαιτάω (diaitáō, “I treat, handle”).
ἁβροδίαιτος (habrodíaitos) δῐαιτάρχης (diaitárkhēs) δῐαίτημᾰ (diaítēma) δῐαιτημᾰτώδης (diaitēmatṓdēs) δῐαιτήσιμος (diaitḗsimos) δῐαίτησῐς (diaítēsis) δῐαιτητέον (diaitētéon) δῐαιτητήρῐον (diaitētḗrion) δῐαιτητής (diaitētḗs) δῐαιτητῐκόν (diaitētikón) δῐαιτητῐκός (diaitētikós) δῐαιτητός (diaitētós) δῐαιτοχορηγῐ́ᾱ (diaitokhorēgíā) δῐαίτωμᾰ (diaítōma) ἰσοδίαιτος (isodíaitos)
πώποτε
EVER YET
πώποτε
ever yet
Adv
πώποτε Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: pópote Phonetic Spelling: (po'-pot-e) Definition: ever yet Usage: at any time, ever.
ποτέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: pote
Phonetic Spelling: (pot-eh’)
Definition: once, ever
Usage: at one time or other, at some time, formerly.
enclitic particle from the same as posos and te
πόσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Correlative Or Interrogative Pronoun Transliteration: posos Phonetic Spelling: (pos'-os) Definition: how much? how great? Usage: how much, how great, how many.
te: and (denotes addition or connection)
Original Word: τέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: te
Phonetic Spelling: (teh)
Definition: and (denotes addition or connection)
Usage: and, both.
té (a conjunction) – “and both” (“both and”). 5037 /té (“and both”) occurs 204 times in the NT and unfortunately is often not translated.
[When translated, 5037 (té) is usually rendered “and,” “both and,” or “and both.”]
ὅτε
WHEN - AT WHICH TIME
hote: when Original Word: ὅτε Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: hote Phonetic Spelling: (hot'-eh) Definition: when Usage: when, at which time.
From ὅς + τέ
Strong's Concordance hos, hé, ho: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Original Word: ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
—————————————————
Strong’s Concordance
te: and (denotes addition or connection)
Original Word: τέ
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: te
Phonetic Spelling: (teh)
Definition: and (denotes addition or connection)
Usage: and, both.
HELPS Word-studies
5037 té (a conjunction) – “and both” (“both and”). 5037 /té (“and both”) occurs 204 times in the NT and unfortunately is often not translated.
[When translated, 5037 (té) is usually rendered “and,” “both and,” or “and both.”]
and (denotes addition or connection)
οὖν
WHAT THEN
oun: therefore, then, (and) so Original Word: οὖν Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: oun Phonetic Spelling: (oon) Definition: therefore, then, (and) so Usage: therefore, then. HELPS Word-studies 3767 oún (a conjunction) – therefore, now then, accordingly so. 3767 (oún) occurs 526 times in the NT and is typically translated "therefore" which means, "By extension, here's how the dots connect."
μέσος
IN THE MIDDLE OF
mesos: middle, in the midst Original Word: μέσος, η, ον Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: mesos Phonetic Spelling: (mes'-os) Definition: middle, in the midst Usage: middle, in the middle, between, in the midst of.
ακόμα
YET - STILL - EVEN - MORE
Adverb
ακόμα • (akóma)
yet, still
Είναι ακόμα ζωντανός.
Eínai akóma zontanós.
He’s still alive.
more, remaining, other
Χρειάζομαι ακόμα δύο μέρες.
Chreiázomai akóma dýo méres.
I need two more days.
even + και (kai)
Ακόμα και η Ελένη είπε ναι!
Akóma kai i Eléni eípe nai!
Even Helen said yes!
Στη χώρα του, ακόμη και το Νοέμβριο κάνει ζέστη.
Sti chóra tou, akómi kai to Noémvrio kánei zésti.
In his country, it’s hot even in November.
Μετά τη δολοφονία, φοβάται ακόμη και να βγει έξω από το σπίτι του
Metá ti dolofonía, fovátai akómi kai na vgei éxo apó to spíti tou
After the killing, he’s afraid even to get out of his house.
even if + και αν (kai an)
even if + και να (kai na)
και όταν (kai ótan); when
followed by a concessive clause
Ακόμη και αν συμφωνούν μεταξύ τους, συμπεριφέρονται άσχημα.
Akómi kai an symfonoún metaxý tous, symperiférontai áschima.
Even if they agree with each other, they behave badly.
Δεν θα την επιτρέψω να χρησιμοποιήσει το αυτοκίνητό μου, ακόμη και να μου το ζητήσει παρακαλώντας.
Den tha tin epitrépso na chrisimopoiísei to aftokínitó mou, akómi kai na mou to zitísei parakalóntas.
I will not allow her to use my car, even if she begs me to.
έτσι
SO - THUS - LIKE THIS - LIKE THAT
Not to be confused with - εστί
ἐστῐ́ • (estí)
third-person singular present active indicative of εἰμί (eimí)
(“he is”)
αν του ζητήσω να μείνει, έτσι;
If I ask him to stay, will he?
να μείνει, έτσι;
To stay, right?
έτσι • (étsi) (indeclinable)
(colloquial) (always with article) indicates a known person
Translations of έτσι
Adverb
so
έτσι, λοιπόν, ούτω
thus
έτσι, ούτως, τοιουτοτροπώς
Thus • ( étsi )
thus ; like this; like that.
( colloquial ) for no reason or for no money
έτσι και (étsi kai, “if”)
έτσι και έτσι (étsi kai étsi), έτσι κέτσι (étsi kétsi, “so-so”)
είτε έτσι είτε αλλιώς (eíte étsi eíte alliós, “one way or another”)
έτσι κι αλλιώς (étsi ki alliós, “anyway”)
έτσι που λες! (étsi pou les!, “so you say!”)
όχι και έτσι (óchi kai étsi, “enough”)
έτσι δεν είναι; (étsi den eínai?, “Isn’t that right?”)
ώστε έτσι; (óste étsi?, “is it?”)
έτσι το ‘πα (étsi to ‘pa, “that’s how I said it!”)
σύντομα
SOON
Adverb
σύντομα • (sýntoma)
soon, quickly (within a short time)
Σύντομα θα είστε ευτυχισμένοι!
Sýntoma tha eíste eftychisménoi!
Soon you will be happy!
Verb
συντομεύω • (syntomévo) (past συντόμευσα/συντόμεψα, passive συντομεύομαι)
shorten, abbreviate, abridge, cut short, reduce (in extent or duration)
σύντομος (sýntomos, “short, quick”)
σύντμηση f (sýntmisi, “abbreviation, cutting”)
συντόμευση f (syntómefsi, “shortening, abbreviation”)
συντομία f (syntomía, “brevity”)
συντομογραφία f (syntomografía, “abbreviation”)
σύντομα (sýntoma, “soon”)
συντόμως (syntómos, “soon”)
μερικός
μέρος
PARTIAL - SOME - A FEW - A PORTION - PARTLY (Merx - Merch)
MEMORY
From μέρος (part & partial) + -ικός (-Adj.)
Adjective
μερικός • (merikós) m (feminine μερική, neuter μερικό)
partial, part, sub
μερικό άθροισμα ― merikó áthroisma ― subtotal
Antonym: ολικός (olikós)
part-time
(in the plural, pronoun) some, a few
Noun μέρος • (méros) n (genitive μέρεος or μέρους); third declension part, component, region share, portion one's turn heritage, lot, destiny member of a set, kind, type
Noun
μέρος • (méros) n (plural μέρη)
(most senses) part (a fraction of a whole)
Το αγγλικό Βικιλεξικό αποτελεί μέρος ενός πολυεθνικού διαδικτυακού εγχειρήματος.
To anglikó Vikilexikó apoteleí méros enós polyethnikoú diadiktyakoú encheirímatos.
English Wiktionary is part of an online multinational project.
place (an area; somewhere within an area)
Σ’ αυτό το μέρος είναι κρυμμένος ένας θησαυρός.
S’ aftó to méros eínai krymménos énas thisavrós.
There’s treasure hidden at this place.
(music) movement, part
Το τρίτο μέρος της συμφωνίας.
To tríto méros tis symfonías.
The third movement of the symphony.
party, side (group of people forming one side in a given dispute)
Τα ενδιαφερόμενα μέρη κατέληξαν σε συμβιβαστική λύση.
Ta endiaferómena méri katélixan se symvivastikí lýsi.
The interested parties reached a compromise.
(euphemistic) loo, privy, commode, lavatory (toilet)
πάω στο μέρος ― páo sto méros ― to go to the loo
From μερ- (mer-), the root of μείρομαι (meíromai, “to receive as one’s portion”) + -ος (-os). Compare μέλος (mélos).
Verb
μείρομαι • (meíromai)
I receive as my portion
From Proto-Indo-European *(s)mer- (“to assign, allot”). See also Latin mereō, merx and Hittite [script needed] (mark, “to divide a sacrifice”).
Verb
mereō (present infinitive merēre, perfect active meruī, supine meritum); second conjugation
I earn, deserve, merit, obtain
I earn a living
Probably from a Proto-Italic cognate of Ancient Greek μέρος (méros, “share, portion”) (from Proto-Indo-European *(s)mer- (“to assign, allot”)) + -eo. See also Latin merx, Ancient Greek μείρομαι (meíromai, “to receive as one’s portion or due”) and Hittite [Term?] (/mark/, “to divide a sacrifice”).
Proto-Indo-European
Root
*(s)mer-
to fall into thinking, remember, care for
———————————————————-
Adjective
μέρμερος • (mérmeros) m or f (neuter μέρμερον); second declension
mischievous, baneful
(of persons) captious, fastidious
Verb μερμηρίζω • (mermērízō) (Epic) to ponder, wonder, reflect to think over to imagine
From μέρμηρα (mérmēra, “care, trouble”) + -ίζω (-ízō)
Verb स्मरति • (smárati) (root स्मृ, class 1, type P) to remember, recall, recollect to recite from memory to regret
From Proto-Indo-Aryan *smárati, from Proto-Indo-Iranian *smárati, from Proto-Indo-European *(s)mer- (“to remember”). Cognate with Persian شمردن (šomordan, “to calculate”), Central Kurdish ژماردن (jmardin, “to count”), Pashto شمېرل (śmerël, “to count”), Ancient Greek μέρμερος (mérmeros, “mischievous, baneful”), Latin memor (“mindful”).
Adjective memor (genitive memoris, comparative memorior, superlative memorissimus, adverb memoriter); third-declension one-termination adjective (non-i-stem) mindful, remembering that has a good memory Synonyms: memoriōse, memoriōsus
Verb
memorō (present infinitive memorāre, perfect active memorāvī, supine memorātum); first conjugation
I remind, bring to mind
I tell, utter, recount
From memor (“remembering, mindful”).
Proto-Indo-European Root *men- to think, mind spiritual activity
Verb
μνάομαι • (mnáomai)
to be mindful, remember, come (have) in remembrance
to woo, court
Verb
μῐμνήσκω • (mimnḗskō)
(active)
(transitive) To remind [+accusative and genitive = someone of something], put in mind
(transitive) To recall something to memory, to make famous
(middle and passive voices)
(transitive) To call to mind, remember [+genitive or less commonly accusative = something, someone]
To remember [+infinitive = that …]
(after Homer) To remember [+participle = doing]
(intransitive) To bear in mind, to not forget
(transitive) To remember aloud, to mention [+genitive = something]
(transitive) To give heed to [+genitive = someone]
Noun
μνῆμα • (mnêma) n (genitive μνήμᾰτος); third declension
memorial, remembrance, record of a person or thing
mound or building in honour of the dead
memorial dedicated to a god
From μνάομαι (mnáomai) + -μα (-ma)
-μᾰ • (-ma) n (genitive -μᾰτος); third declension
Added to verbal stems to form neuter nouns denoting the result or effect an action, a particular instance of an action, or the object of an action
γράφω (gráphō, “write”) → γράμμα (grámma, “that which is written, letter”)
σχίζω (skhízō, “divide”) → σχίσμα (skhísma, “that which is divided”)
ἀθλέω (athléō, “compete”) → ἄθλημα (áthlēma, “contest”)
ἀθύρω (athúrō, “play”) → ἄθυρμα (áthurma, “toy”)
νοέω (noéō, “think”) → νόημα (nóēma, “thought”)
ποιέω (poiéō, “make”) → ποίημα (poíēma, “poem, or in general something made”)
δέρω (dérō, “flay, skin”) → δέρμα (dérma, “skin”)
τέμνω (témnō, “cut”) → τμῆμα (tmêma, “section”)
σπείρω (speírō, “sow”) → σπέρμα (spérma, “that which is sown, seed”)
βδελύττομαι (bdelúttomai, “to feel nausea, to be sick”) → βδέλυγμα (bdélugma, “abomination”)
ἐκπῑ́νω (ekpī́nō, “drink out”) → ἔκπωμα (ékpōma, “drinking-cup”)
θεωρέω (theōréō, “observe”) → θεώρημα (theṓrēma, “observation, theorem”)
Suffix
-μα • (-ma) n
added to a verb form to create gerund and action nouns:
καπνίζω (kapnízo, “to smoke”) + -μα (-ma) → κάπνισμα (kápnisma, “smoking”)
ζεσταίνω (zestaíno, “to heat up”) + -μα (-ma) → ζέσταμα (zéstama, “warming up”)
τελειώνω (teleióno, “to end”) + -μα (-ma) → τελείωμα (teleíoma, “ending”)
ανοίγω (anoígo, “to open”) + -μα (-ma) → άνοιγμα (ánoigma, “opening”)
Noun
μνήμα • (mníma) n (plural μνήματα)
grave, sepulchre, tomb
see: μνήμη f (mními, “remembrance, memory”)
Noun μνήμη • (mními) f (plural μνήμες) memory remembrance reminiscence
Noun
θύμηση • (thýmisi) f (plural θύμησες)
(literary) memory (specific and general)
Noun
ανάμνηση • (anámnisi) f (plural αναμνήσεις)
Remember, memory
From ανά- (re-, again) + μνηση (memory)
Noun
αμνηστία • (amnistía) f (uncountable)
amnesty
να δίνει αμνηστία ― na dínei amnistía ― to give amnesty
αμνήστευση f (amnístefsi, “amnesty, pardoning”)
αμνηστεύω (amnistévo, “to pardon”)
and see: μνήμη f (mními, “remembrance, memory”)
Noun
ᾰ̓μνηστῐ́ᾱ • (amnēstíā) f (genitive ᾰ̓μνηστῐ́ᾱς); first declension
forgetfulness
(and especially) an amnesty
failure to mention (a thing), passing (it) over.
From ᾰ̓́μνηστος (“forgotten, forgetful”) + -ῐ́ᾱ (abstract noun suffix), ultimately from μνάομαι (“remember”).
Adjective
αμνησίκακος • (amnisíkakos) m (feminine αμνησίκακη, neuter αμνησίκακο)
forgiving
Noun
αμνησικακία • (amnisikakía) f (uncountable)
forgiveness
Synonym: ανεξικακία (anexikakía)
Noun
ανεξικακία • (anexikakía) f (uncountable)
forgiveness, forbearance
Adjective
ανεξίκακος • (anexíkakos) m (feminine ανεξίκακη, neuter ανεξίκακο)
unresentful, forgiving (forgetful of hatred, etc)
Verb
ανεξικακώ • (anexikakó)
tolerate wrongdoing, forgive
ἤ
“OR”
CONTRAST ONE THING TO ANOTHER
COMPARE THIS TO THAT
ἤ Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle Transliteration: é Phonetic Spelling: (ay) Definition: or, than Usage: or, than.
ἤ, a disjunctive conjunction
- to distinguish things or thoughts which either mutually exclude each other, or one of which can take the place of the other: (“or”)
to distinguish one thing from another in words of the same construction:
after an interrogative or a declarative sentence, before a question designed to prove the same thing in another way:
before a sentence contrary to the one just preceding, to indicate that if one be denied or refuted the other must stand:
καίτοιγε καίτοι καί τοί γε
AND YET INDEED!
From καί (and) + τοί (since thereupon) + γε (intensifying)
καίτοιγε Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: kaitoige Phonetic Spelling: (kah'-ee-toyg-eh) Definition: and yet, indeed Usage: and yet, although, indeed. HELPS Word-studies 2544 kaítoige (from 2543 /kaítoi, "even so, indeed" and 1065 /gé, "indeed, really") – although – literally, "even so indeed" (= really!).
καίτοι Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: kaitoi Phonetic Spelling: (kah'-ee-toy) Definition: and yet Usage: and yet, although, though. HELPS Word-studies 2543 kaítoi (a compound particle from 2532 /kaí, "and, even" and 5104 /toí, "indeed") – even yet, though indeed. 2543 (kaítoi) focuses on the first part of a comparison.
καί Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: kai Phonetic Spelling: (kahee) Definition: and, even, also Usage: and, even, also, namely. HELPS Word-studies 2532 kaí (the most common NT conjunction, used over 9,000 times) – and (also), very often, moreover, even, indeed (the context determines the exact sense).
[After 2532 (kaí), the most common word in the Greek NT is the definite article (“the”). 2532 (kaí) is never adversative, i.e. it never means “however” (“but”) – unlike the principal conjunction (waw) in OT Hebrew (G. Archer).]
τοί
Transliteration: toi
Phonetic Spelling: (toy)
Definition: an enclitic particle of asseveration used as a prefix or suff. in the N.T
HELPS Word-studies
5104 toí – indeed-consequently (often translated therefore, thereupon, whereupon). “In the NT, 5102 (títlos) is only used in composition” (Zodhiates, Dictionary), i.e. in a compound term like 2544 (kaítoige) or 5106 (toínyn).
γε
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: ge
Phonetic Spelling: (gheh)
Definition: emphasizes the word to which it is joined
Usage: an enclitic, emphasizing particle: at least, indeed, really, but generally too subtle to be represented in English.
HELPS Word-studies
1065 gé – an emphatic particle meaning at least, indeed. 1065 (gé) adds the idea “assuredly (really)” which stresses the salient part of a comparison (a two-part statement). 1065 (gé) emphasizes “the key idea/word that follows it” (R, 1148; Bäumlein, 54).
οἷός τ’ εἰμί
BE ABLE
οἷός τ’ εἰμί (hoîós t’ eimí, “be able”)
Conjunction
τε • (te)
and, also or untranslatable
From ὅς (hós, relative pronoun) + -ιος (-ios, adjectival suffix).
Determiner
οἷος • (hoîos) (feminine οἵᾱ, neuter οἷον)
relative adjective of quality such as; what sort, manner, kind of
introducing an exclamation
(in an independent clause) what a (great, terrible) …!
(in a subordinate clause) the (great, terrible) sort that
containing a comparison, and sometimes an inference
in many Homeric expressions the omission of the antecedent clause is to be noticed
especially in Attic often stands for ὅτι τοῖος/τοία/τοῖον (hóti toîos/toía/toîon), so that the relative introduces the reason for the preceding statement
if it is to be intimated that the reason is self-evident, and the assertion is beyond doubt, then δή (dḗ) is added
but if the comparison or inference only denotes a general or doubtful resemblance, then Homer uses οἷός τε (hoîós te)
when a comparison involves a definition of time οἷος ὅτε (hoîos hóte) is used
many brief Attic expressions are also explained by the omission of the demonstrative pronoun before οἷος (hoîos)
never used like the adverb οἷον (hoîon) with a positive adjective
οἷος (hoîos) with an infinitive implies fitness or ability in or for a thing
but this sense is commonly expressed by οἷος τε (hoîos te)
(without infinitive)
the relative is in Attic often repeated in the same clause.
Derived terms ἄλλοιος (álloios) ἑτεροῖος (heteroîos) οἷον (hoîon, adverb) ὅμοιος (hómoios) ἀνόμοιος (anómoios) παρόμοιος (parómoios) προσόμοιος (prosómoios) παντοῖος (pantoîos)
δεῦτε
δεῦρο
COME HERE - COME HITHER
Δεῦτε
Come here!
V-M-2P
δεῦτε Part of Speech: Verb Transliteration: deute Phonetic Spelling: (dyoo'-teh) Definition: come! Usage: come hither, come, hither, an exclamatory word.
δεῦρο Part of Speech: Adverb; Verb Transliteration: deuro Phonetic Spelling: (dyoo'-ro) Definition: until now, come here! Usage: (originally: hither, hence) (a) exclamatory: come, (b) temporal: now, the present.
μεταξὺ
IN THE MEANTIME
μεταξὺ
meantime
Adv
ἔτι
STILL - YET - EVEN NOW
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition.
πάλιν
BACK AGAIN - ONCE MORE - ON THE OTHER HAND
πάλιν
again
Adv
πάλιν
Part of Speech: Adverb
Transliteration: palin
Phonetic Spelling: (pal’-in)
Definition: back (of place), again (of time), further
Usage: again, back, once more, further, on the other hand.
ὅπου
WHERE
ὅπου
where
Adv
ὅπου Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: hopou Phonetic Spelling: (hop'-oo) Definition: where Usage: where, whither, in what place.
from hos, and pou
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ Part of Speech: Relative Pronoun Transliteration: hos, hé, ho Phonetic Spelling: (hos) Definition: usually rel. who, which, that, also demonstrative this, that Usage: who, which, what, that.
πού Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: pou Phonetic Spelling: (poo) Definition: somewhere Usage: where, somewhere, anywhere; with numerals: somewhere about.
ἤδη
ALREADY, NOW AFTER ALL THIS WAITING
ἤδη Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: édé Phonetic Spelling: (ay'-day) Definition: already Usage: already; now at length, now after all this waiting. HELPS Word-studies 2235 ḗdē (a temporal adverb) – already now, even now, referring to what is not yet strictly present but already (now) impacts the present (= "already now").
[2235 (ḗdē) is “a point of time preceding another point of time and implying completion – ‘already’” (L & N, 1, 67.20). It often factors in something strictly future, but can include anything that is not strictly present.]
μήτι
CAN IT BE THAT - IF NOT - UNLESS - WHETHER AT ALL
From μή (not conditionally, should not) + τι (a certain one)
μήτι
Can it be [that]
IntPrtcl
μήτι Part of Speech: Particle, Interrogative Transliteration: méti Phonetic Spelling: (may'-tee) Definition: can this be? (interrogative particle expecting a negative answer) Usage: if not, unless, whether at all.
3385 mḗti (from 3361 /mḗ, “not” and 5101 /tís, “anything”) – properly, not perhaps, “no on first blush (reaction)” – while still keeping “the possibility open” to elicit the desired reaction from the listener (reader). 3385 (mḗti) then draws out an immediate “no,” while still conjuring the idea, “unless . . . “.
Example: Jn 4:29: “Come, see a man who told me all the things that I have done; this is not (3385 /mḗti) the Christ, is it?” (NASU).
A. T. Robertson, “Is not this the Christ (3385 /mḗti) . . . “ elicits “the negative answer (‘this cannot be’) . . . ‘unless He really is the Christ!’ (holding out the ‘diplomatic possibility’) and thus heightening their interest” (WS, 429,30).
μή
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: mé
Phonetic Spelling: (may)
Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Usage: not, lest.
HELPS Word-studies
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates "subjectively," ruling out any implications ("suggestions") that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
τις, τι
Part of Speech: Indefinite Pronoun
Transliteration: tis
Phonetic Spelling: (tis)
Definition: a certain one, someone, anyone
Usage: any one, some one, a certain one or thing.
πώς
AT ALL
-πώς
Transliteration: pós
Phonetic Spelling: (poce)
Definition: at all
4458= ???
4458 pōs – properly, how (conveying “indefiniteness of manner,” S. Zodhiates, Dict); a particle meaning, “if (somehow)” or “if possibly,” when used with the Gk conjunction, ei (J. Thayer) – or meaning “lest by any means” when it is used with the Gk negative, mē.
See also 1513 (eí pōs) and 3381 (mḗpōs).
[4458 (-pṓs) is an enclitic, and therefore distinguished from the interrogative adverb 4459 /pṓs (“how”) that uses a circumflex accent.]
εἰπώς
ei pós: if somehow
Transliteration: ei pós
Definition: if somehow
εἰπώς
εἰ (if) + πώς (at all)
IF SOMEHOW - IF AT ALL
εἰπώς
ei pós: if somehow
Transliteration: ei pós
Definition: if somehow
ei: forasmuch as, if, that Original Word: εἰ Part of Speech: Conditional Particle Or Conjunction Transliteration: ei Phonetic Spelling: (i) Definition: forasmuch as, if, that Usage: if.
1487 ei (a conditional conjunction) – if. 1487 /ei (followed by any verb) expresses "a condition, thought of as real, or to denote assumptions" (i.e. viewed as factual. for the sake of argument)
(BAGD). Accordingly, 1487 (ei) should not be translated “since,” but rather always “if” – since the assumption may only be portrayed as valid (true, factual).
a prim. particle; if, whether (a cond. part. introducing circumstances nec. for a given proposition to be true
πώς
Transliteration: pós
Phonetic Spelling: (poce)
Definition: at all
μήπως
LEST IN ANY WAY - LEST PERHAPS - WHETHER PERHAPS
μήπως Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative Transliteration: mé pós Phonetic Spelling: (may'-pos) Definition: lest perhaps, whether perhaps Usage: lest in any way, lest perhaps. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin see mé and pós
μή
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: mé
Phonetic Spelling: (may)
Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Usage: not, lest.
HELPS Word-studies
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates "subjectively," ruling out any implications ("suggestions") that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
not, that…not, lest (used for qualified negation)
universally: ᾧ μή πάρεστι ταῦτα, where μή is used because reference is made merely to the thought that there are those who lack these things, 2 Peter 1:9; ἅ μή ἑώρακεν, which (in my opinion) he hath not seen (because they are not visible)
where, indeed, a definite person or thing is referred to, but in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by the participle) is denied in the thought or judgment either of the writer or of some other person.
with the third person (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist imperative where the prohibition relates to something not to be begun, and where things about to be done are forbidden:
not, lest, neither, never
A primary particle of qualified negation (whereas ou expresses an absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas ou expects an affirmative one)) whether – any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, + lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not, nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in substantially the same relations. See also ean me, hina me, ou me, mekos, mekuno, men, me ouk.
πῶς
HOW
πῶς (pōs) — 118 Occurrences Matthew 6:28 Adv GRK: τοῦ ἀγροῦ πῶς αὐξάνουσιν οὐ NAS: Observe how the lilies KJV: of the field, how they grow; INT: of the field how they grow [they do] not
Matthew 7:4 Adv GRK: ἢ πῶς ἐρεῖς τῷ NAS: Or how can you say to your brother, KJV: Or how wilt thou say to thy INT: Or how will you say to the
Matthew 10:19 Adv GRK: μὴ μεριμνήσητε πῶς ἢ τί NAS: you over, do not worry about how or KJV: no thought how or what INT: not be anxious how or what
Matthew 12:4 Adv GRK: πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς NAS: how he entered the house KJV: How he entered into the house INT: How he entered into
Matthew 12:26 Adv GRK: ἑαυτὸν ἐμερίσθη πῶς οὖν σταθήσεται NAS: himself; how then KJV: against himself; how shall then INT: himself he was divided How then will stand
Matthew 12:29 Adv GRK: ἢ πῶς δύναταί τις NAS: Or how can anyone KJV: Or else how can one INT: Or how is able anyone
Matthew 12:34 Adv GRK: γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν πῶς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ NAS: of vipers, how can KJV: of vipers, how can ye, INT: Offspring of vipers how are you able good things
Matthew 16:11 Adv GRK: πῶς οὐ νοεῖτε NAS: How is it that you do not understand KJV: How is it that ye do INT: How not understand you
Matthew 21:20 Adv
GRK: ἐθαύμασαν λέγοντες Πῶς παραχρῆμα ἐξηράνθη
NAS: and asked, How did the fig tree
KJV: saying, How soon
INT: marveled saying How immediately is dried up
ἵνα
SO THAT NOT - NOT LEST THAT - ALBIET NOT
Original Word: ἵνα
Transliteration: hina mé
Phonetic Spelling: (hin’-ah may)
Definition: albeit not, lest, that
a prim. conjunction denoting purpose, definition or result
Definition
in order that, that, so that
NASB Translation
fear* (2), order (23), otherwise* (3), result (1), so (306), so* (12), why* (3).
ἵνα
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: hina
Phonetic Spelling: (hin'-ah)
Definition: in order that, that, so that
Usage: in order that, so that.
HELPS Word-studies
2443 hína (a subordinating conjunction) – for the purpose that (in order that), looking to the aim (intended result) of the verbal idea. 2443 /hína ("for the purpose that") is "the semantically marked (dramatic) way of expressing purpose in Greek (as compared for example to the plain infinitive)" (G. Archer).
[2443 9hina) answers to lemaʽan in Hebrew.]
μήν
CERTAINLY - TRULY - VERILY
mén: certainly Original Word: μήν Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle Transliteration: mén Phonetic Spelling: (mane) Definition: certainly Usage: assuredly, certainly.
μέν
Part of Speech: Particle, Disjunctive Particle
Transliteration: men
Phonetic Spelling: (men)
Definition: shows affirmation or concession
Usage: an untranslatable particle, generally answered by de, each of the two introducing a clause intended to be contrasted with the other.
HELPS Word-studies
3303 mén (a conjunction) – indeed, verily (truly).
πώποτε
NOT YET - HAS EVER YET - AT ANY TIME
πώποτε (pōpote) — 6 Occurrences Luke 19:30 Adv GRK: ὃν οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἀνθρώπων ἐκάθισεν NAS: no one yet has ever sat; untie INT: which no one ever yet of men sat
John 1:18 Adv
GRK: οὐδεὶς ἑώρακεν πώποτε μονογενὴς θεὸς
NAS: God at any time; the only begotten
KJV: God at any time; the only begotten
INT: no one has seen ever yet only-begotten God
John 5:37 Adv
GRK: φωνὴν αὐτοῦ πώποτε ἀκηκόατε οὔτε
NAS: heard His voice at any time nor seen
KJV: his voice at any time, nor seen
INT: voice of him at any time have you heard nor
John 6:35 Adv
GRK: μὴ διψήσει πώποτε
INT: not may thirst at any time
John 8:33 Adv
GRK: οὐδενὶ δεδουλεύκαμεν πώποτε πῶς σὺ
NAS: and have never yet been enslaved
KJV: and were never in bondage to any man:
INT: to no one have been under bondage ever how you
1 John 4:12 Adv
GRK: θεὸν οὐδεὶς πώποτε τεθέαται ἐὰν
NAS: has seen God at any time; if we love
KJV: hath seen God at any time. If we love
INT: God no one at any time has seen if
————————————————————————————————-
————————————————————————————————-
Δε Δεν δε δεν οὐδὲ οὐδέν ουδείς οὐδένα οὐδέπω μὴ οὐ μή οὐ ουξ οὐχ όχι οὐκ ουχί οὐχὶ κανείς κανένας τίποτε τίποτα ξε-
NEGATION
Δε Δεν δε δεν οὐδὲ οὐδέν ουδείς οὐδένα οὐδέπω μὴ οὐ μή οὐ ουξ οὐχ όχι οὐκ ουχί οὐχὶ κανείς κανένας τίποτε τίποτα
ἀ- (alpha) is used as a prefix (called its “privative use”) and typically means “no” or “not” (= “un-,” “without”).
ἄλφα privative (στερητικόν), like the Latin in-, the English un-, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is prefixed
ξε- (-un, not, without property)
ξε- xe- or xe- and x- ( for verbs ) opposite energy of the original word ξε βάφω , the end of the state indicated by the original word ξε νυστάζω out , out un portizo , un born , un Barks ( emphasis , exaggeration ) completely un kardizomai , un gods , un deafen ( oral ) in casual compositions and stereotypes: shows rejection or indifference I said ξ I said ≈ Synonyms : μ-
Particle
δε • (de) (negating particle)
Alternative form of δεν (not)
δέν did not (didn’t) will not (won’t) can not (can’t) should not (shouldn’t) could not (couldn’t) would not (wouldn’t) shall not (shan’t) must not (mustn’t) Usage notes This form is used only when the following letter is a vowel or a plosive consonant (κ, τ, π, ξ, ψ, γκ, ντ, μπ). δεν (den) and δε (de) are used with indicative verb forms, but μην (min) and μη (mi) are used with subjunctive verbs and imperatives.
Adverb
οὐδέν • (oudén)
in no way, not at all
οὐδέν (“in no way”)
Don’t confuse with… From Ancient Greek δέ (dé, “and, but”) Conjunction δε • (de) also, but also
οὐ μή
no not ever (strongly negates all facts and all possibilities)
μὴ
not [for]
Adv
οὐχ
not
Adv
objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
οὐ
not
Adv
objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
οὐκ
not
Adv
objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
οὖκ
οὐχὶ
ουξ
οὐδὲ
οὐδέν, nothing at all
οὐδέπω (not yet, never before, not even possible)
from οὐδέ = οὐ (neither, nor) + δέ (but, on the other hand, however, moreover)
from -πω (yet, even)
from -πώς (if at all), (“if (somehow)” or “if possibly,”)
from -πώς [conveying “indefiniteness of manner,”]
οὐδείς
οὐδένα
Translations of no
όχι
not, no, nope
ουχί
no
ουδείς
no, none
μή οὐκ
neither, never, not.
οὐ μή
Phonetic Spelling: (oo may)
Definition: anymore, at all, neither, never
i.e. μή and οὐ; as interrogative and negative, is it not that?
neither (followed by no), + never, not. Compare οὐ μή.
μη ουχί
ἐὰν μή
Phonetic Spelling: (eh-an’ may)
Definition: if not, before, but, except, unless
3362 eán mḗ (consisting of 1437 /ἐὰν, “if” and 3361 /μή, “not”)
literally, “if not.”
i.e. ἐὰν and μή; if not, i.e. Unless – X before, but, except, if, no
(if, + whosoever) not.
ἵνα μή Transliteration: hina mé Phonetic Spelling: (hin'-ah may) Definition: albeit not, lest, so that that i.e. hina and me; in order (or so) that not -- albeit not, lest, that, no(-t, (-thing)). ἵνα Part of Speech: Conjunction Transliteration: hina Phonetic Spelling: (hin'-ah) Definition: in order that, that, so that
οὐ μή
Transliteration: ou mé
Phonetic Spelling: (oo may)
Definition: anymore, at all, neither, never
3364 ou mḗ (from 3756 /ou, “ not a fact” and 3361 /mḗ, “not a possibility”) – a double negative which emphatically conveys, “not a fact . . . not even a possibility!” – literally, “no, no!”
[In English, a double negative has a positive meaning. In Greek, a double negative is extra-emphatic, expressing very dramatic, forceful negation.]
anymore, at all, neither, never
i.e. ou and me; a double negative strengthening the denial; not at all – any more, at all, by any (no) means, neither, never, no (at all), in no case (wise), nor ever, not (at all, in any wise).
μὴ οὐκ
Transliteration: mé ouk
Phonetic Spelling: (may ook)
Definition: neither, never, not
Pronoun κανείς • (kaneís) m (less colloquial) Nominative masculine form of κανένας (kanénas). Pronoun κανείς nothing, nobody, no one Pronoun κανένας • (kanénas) m may also act as a determiner nobody, no one (not any person; the logical negation of somebody) Και τελικά δεν ήρθε κανένας. Kai teliká den írthe kanénas. And finally no one came. Δεν βλέπω κανέναν. Den vlépo kanénan. I cannot see anyone. anyone, anybody Βλέπετε κανέναν; Vlépete kanénan? Can you see anybody? Ήρθε κανένας στο γραφείο; Írthe kanénas sto grafeío? Did anyone come to the office?
δεν είναι τίποτα
it is nothing, no worries, not important
Pronoun
τίποτε • (típote) m
nothing
Δεν κάνει τίποτε. ― Den kánei típote. ― it’s nothing, you’re welcome.
Δε ζητώ τίποτε. ― De zitó típote. ― I “seek” ask for nothing.
(in a negative clause or question) something, any, anything
Σου περισσεύουν τίποτε χρήματα; ― Sou perissévoun típote chrímata? ― Do you have any money left over?
Δε θέλω τίποτε. ― De thélo típote. ― I don’t want anything.
Usage notes[edit]
Τίποτε should only be translated as the word anything in a negative clause, for example in the sentence:
Όχι, δε θέλω τίποτε. ― Óchi, de thélo típote. ― No, I don’t want anything.
or in questions:
Θέλεις τίποτε; ― Théleis típote? ― Do you want anything?
οὐ
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch
Phonetic Spelling: (oo)
Definition: not, no
Usage: no, not.
3756 ou – no ("not"). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, "ruling it out as fact."
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
μή
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: mé
Phonetic Spelling: (may)
Definition: not, that…not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Usage: not, lest.
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates “subjectively,” ruling out any implications (“suggestions”) that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
μήπως
Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative
Transliteration: mé pós
Phonetic Spelling: (may’-pos)
Definition: lest perhaps, whether perhaps
Usage: lest in any way, lest perhaps.
from μή and πως; lest somehow – lest (by any means, by some means, haply, perhaps).
οὐ / μή / όχι
νη- νᾱ- νω- ᾰ̓- un-
μή
μην
δεν
οὐδέν
οὐκ ουχ ουξ όχι οὐκί οὐχί
NEGATION
οὐ — Negates facts. (Indicatives)
μή — Negates possibilities and implications. (Subjunctives)
όχι — Negates binding, agreement, capacity or a negative reply.
μή Rules out and negates “the Ought” Negates “the Should” Negates “the Could” Negates “the Would” Negates “the May / Might” Negates “the Possible” Negates “the Probable” Negates “the Potential” Negates “the Implications” Negates “the Conditional” — (not: if this, then that) Negates “the Dependencies” — (not: that depends upon this)
μην
Alternative form of μη (not)
Use this form in place of μη (not) when the following letter is a vowel or a plosive consonant (ie κ, ξ, π, τ, ψ, γκ, ντ, μπ).
Example
μην τον εμπιστευεσαι
Do not trust him. (τον = τ)
μην and μη are used with subjunctive verbs, but δεν and δε are used with indicative verb forms.
οὐκ ουχ ουξ όχι οὐκί οὐχί
Negates any implications from irrealis modal verbs.
Negates “Subjectively” and “Subjunctively” ruling out any implications (“suggestions”) that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
(“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
(“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.
——————————————————————————
οὐ
Negates and Rules out Facts.
Negates “Realis” indicative non-modal verbs.
objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
Ου οὐ οὔ οὒ
οὐδὲ ουκ οὐκ οὖκ
ουξ ουχ οὐχ όυχ
——————————————————————————
οὐ μή
From οὐ “not a fact” and μή “not a possibility” – a double negative which emphatically conveys, “not a fact . . . not even a possibility!” – literally, “no, no!”
In English, a double negative has a positive meaning. In Greek, a double negative is extra-emphatic, expressing very dramatic, forceful negation.
——————————————————————————
Adverb
όχι • (óchi)
no (negative reply)
Μιλάτε αγγλικά; Όχι.
Miláte angliká? Óchi.
Do you speak English? No.
no, not (negation)
όχι καλά ― óchi kalá ― not good
not, in elliptical clauses
Χρειάζομαι χρήματα, όχι υποσχέσεις.
Chreiázomai chrímata, óchi yposchéseis.
I need money, not promises.
όχι
from Ancient Greek οὐχί (oukhí)
possibly from οὐκί (oukí, “not so, never”)
Alternative forms
οὐκ (ouk) – before vowel with smooth breathing
οὐχ (oukh) – before vowel with rough breathing
οὔ (oú) – pausal form
οὐχί (oukhí) – Epic, Attic
οὐκί (oukí) – Epic, Ionic
——————————————————————
NEGATION PREFIXES
νη- νᾱ- νω- ᾰ̓- un-
Adjective
νηλεής • (nēleḗs) m or f (neuter νηλεές); third declension
merciless, pitiless
unpitied
νη- (nē-, negative prefix) + ἔλεος (éleos, “mercy, pity”)
Prefix νη- • (nē-) Alternative form of ἀ- (a-) Related terms νᾱ- (nā-) νω- (nō-)
Prefix
ᾰ̓- • (a-)
The alpha privativum, used to make words that have a sense opposite to the word (or stem) to which the prefix is attached. It is also known as privative a and alpha privative.
Prefix
νᾱ- • (nā-)
Alternative form of ἀ- (a-)
Prefix
νω- • (nō-)
Alternative form of ἀ- (a-)
From Proto-Indo-European *n̥- (“not, un-”)
μή
nothing
Adv
—————————————————————-
From Ancient Greek οὐδέν (oudén, “in no way”).
Pronunciation
IPA(key): /ðen/
Particle
δεν • (den) (negating particle)
not
Δεν ήρθα χθες στο γραφείο. ― Den írtha chthes sto grafeío. ― I didn’t come to the office yesterday.
Δεν έρχεσαι μαζί μας; ― Den érchesai mazí mas? ― Won’t you come with us?
not (with stress on the negative aspect of a statement)
Πήρε δεν πήρε εκατό ευρώ. ― Píre den píre ekató evró. ― He didn’t even get one hundred euros.
Usage notes
This form is used only when the following letter is a vowel or a plosive consonant (κ, τ, π, ξ, ψ, γκ, ντ, μπ).
δεν (den) and δε (de) are used with indicative verb forms, but μην (min) and μη (mi) are used with subjunctive verbs and imperatives.
Synonyms
μην (min), μη (mi)
μή
NEGATION
μή
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: mé
Phonetic Spelling: (may)
Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Usage: not, lest.
HELPS Word-studies
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates "subjectively," ruling out any implications ("suggestions") that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
not, that…not, lest (used for qualified negation)
universally: ᾧ μή πάρεστι ταῦτα, where μή is used because reference is made merely to the thought that there are those who lack these things, 2 Peter 1:9; ἅ μή ἑώρακεν, which (in my opinion) he hath not seen (because they are not visible)
where, indeed, a definite person or thing is referred to, but in such a way that his (its) quality or action (indicated by the participle) is denied in the thought or judgment either of the writer or of some other person.
with the third person (nowhere in the N. T. with the second) of the aorist imperative where the prohibition relates to something not to be begun, and where things about to be done are forbidden:
not, lest, neither, never
A primary particle of qualified negation (whereas ou expresses an absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas ou expects an affirmative one)) whether – any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, + lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not, nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in substantially the same relations. See also ean me, hina me, ou me, mekos, mekuno, men, me ouk.
οὐ
NOT
οὐ — 699 Occ.
οὐχ — 105 Occ.
οὐκ — 830 Occ.
οὐ
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch
Phonetic Spelling: (oo)
Definition: not, no
Usage: no, not.
HELPS Word-studies
3756 ou – no ("not"). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, "ruling it out as fact."
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
It is joined to other words — to a finite verb, simply to deny that what is declared in the verb applies to the subject of the sentence:
οὐ, it strengthens the negation, nay, nay, by no means
οὐ (ou) — 699 Occurrences Matthew 5:14 Adv GRK: τοῦ κόσμου οὐ δύναται πόλις KJV: on an hill cannot be hid. INT: of the world not is able A city
Matthew 5:18 Adv
GRK: μία κεραία οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ
INT: one tittle no not shall pass away
Matthew 5:20 Adv
GRK: καὶ Φαρισαίων οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθητε
INT: and Pharisees no not shall you enter
Matthew 5:21 Adv
GRK: τοῖς ἀρχαίοις Οὐ φονεύσεις ὃς
KJV: Thou shalt not kill;
INT: to the ancients not You will murder whoever
Matthew 5:26 Adv
GRK: λέγω σοι οὐ μὴ ἐξέλθῃς
INT: I say to you no not shall you come out
Matthew 5:27 Adv
GRK: ὅτι ἐρρέθη Οὐ μοιχεύσεις
KJV: Thou shalt not commit adultery:
INT: that it was said not You will commit adultery
Matthew 5:36 Adv
GRK: ὀμόσῃς ὅτι οὐ δύνασαι μίαν
KJV: because thou canst not make one
INT: shall you swear because not you are able one
Matthew 5:37 Adv GRK: ναὶ ναί οὒ οὔ τὸ NAS: yes [or] 'No, no; KJV: Yea, yea; Nay, nay: for INT: Yes yes no no [anything]
Matthew 5:37 Adv GRK: ναί οὒ οὔ τὸ δὲ NAS: [or] 'No, no; anything beyond KJV: yea; Nay, nay: for whatsoever is more INT: yes no no [anything] moreover
Matthew 6:20 Adv
GRK: ὅπου κλέπται οὐ διορύσσουσιν οὐδὲ
KJV: thieves do not break through nor
INT: where theives not do break in nor
Matthew 6:24 Adv
GRK: ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει οὐ δύνασθε θεῷ
KJV: despise the other. Ye cannot serve God
INT: other he will despise not You are able God
Matthew 6:26 Adv
GRK: οὐρανοῦ ὅτι οὐ σπείρουσιν οὐδὲ
KJV: they sow not, neither
INT: air that not they sow nor
Matthew 6:28 Adv
GRK: πῶς αὐξάνουσιν οὐ κοπιῶσιν οὐδὲ
KJV: they toil not, neither
INT: how they grow [they do] not labor nor
Matthew 6:30 Adv
GRK: οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον
KJV: the oven, [shall he] not much
INT: thus clothes [will he] not much more
Matthew 7:3 Adv
GRK: ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς
KJV: considerest not the beam
INT: eye beam not notice
Matthew 7:18 Adv
GRK: οὐ δύναται δένδρον
KJV: A good tree cannot bring forth evil
INT: not is able a tree
Matthew 7:21 Adv
GRK: Οὐ πᾶς ὁ
KJV: Not every one that saith
INT: Not everyone who
Matthew 7:22 Adv
GRK: Κύριε κύριε οὐ τῷ σῷ
KJV: Lord, have we not prophesied in thy
INT: Lord Lord not your
οὐχ (ouch) — 105 Occurrences Matthew 6:26 Adv GRK: τρέφει αὐτά οὐχ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλον KJV: Are ye not much better than INT: feeds them not you much
Matthew 7:29 Adv
GRK: ἔχων καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ
KJV: authority, and not as the scribes.
INT: having and not as the
Matthew 12:43 Adv
GRK: ἀνάπαυσιν καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκει
KJV: and findeth none.
INT: rest and none finds [it]
Matthew 13:55 Adv
GRK: οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν
KJV: Is not this the carpenter’s
INT: not this is
Matthew 13:55 Adv
GRK: τέκτονος υἱός οὐχ ἡ μήτηρ
INT: carpenter son [Is] not the mother
Matthew 20:26 Adv
GRK: οὐχ οὕτως ἔσται
KJV: But it shall not be so
INT: Not thus will it be
Matthew 26:39 Adv
GRK: τοῦτο πλὴν οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ
KJV: me: nevertheless not as I
INT: this nevertheless not as I
Matthew 26:60 Adv
GRK: καὶ οὐχ εὗρον πολλῶν
KJV: But found none: yea, though many
INT: but not any they found many
Mark 1:22 Adv
GRK: ἔχων καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ
KJV: authority, and not as the scribes.
INT: having and not as the
Mark 2:27 Adv
GRK: ἐγένετο καὶ οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος
KJV: for man, and not man for
INT: was made and not the man
Mark 4:21 Adv
GRK: τὴν κλίνην οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ
KJV: under a bed? and not to be set
INT: the bed [Is it] not that upon
Mark 6:3 Adv
GRK: οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν
KJV: Is not this the carpenter,
INT: not this is
Mark 10:43 Adv
GRK: οὐχ οὕτως δέ
KJV: so shall it not be among
INT: not thus however
Mark 14:55 Adv
GRK: αὐτόν καὶ οὐχ ηὕρισκον
KJV: and found none.
INT: him but not did find [any]
Luke 11:40 Adv
GRK: ἄφρονες οὐχ ὁ ποιήσας
KJV: did not he that made
INT: Fools [did] not the [one] having made
Luke 13:6 Adv
GRK: αὐτῇ καὶ οὐχ εὗρεν
KJV: and found none.
INT: it and not did find [any]
Luke 13:7 Adv
GRK: ταύτῃ καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκω ἔκκοψον
KJV: and find none: cut it
INT: this and not do find [any] cut down
Luke 17:18 Adv GRK: οὐχ εὑρέθησαν ὑποστρέψαντες NAS: Was no one found who returned KJV: There are not found that returned INT: not were there found [any] having returned
Luke 19:48 Adv
GRK: καὶ οὐχ εὕρισκον τὸ
KJV: And could not find what
INT: and not they found
Luke 22:26 Adv
GRK: ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἀλλ’
KJV: But ye [shall] not [be] so: but
INT: you moreover not thus [shall be] but
Luke 24:3 Adv
GRK: εἰσελθοῦσαι δὲ οὐχ εὗρον τὸ
KJV: and found not the body
INT: having entered moreover not they found the
John 4:35 Adv
GRK: οὐχ ὑμεῖς λέγετε
KJV: Say not ye, There
INT: Not you say
John 4:38 Adv
GRK: θερίζειν ὃ οὐχ ὑμεῖς κεκοπιάκατε
KJV: ye bestowed no labour: other men
INT: to reap on which not you have toiled
John 6:26 Adv
GRK: ζητεῖτέ με οὐχ ὅτι εἴδετε
KJV: Ye seek me, not because ye saw
INT: You seek me not because you saw
John 6:38 Adv
GRK: τοῦ οὐρανοῦ οὐχ ἵνα ποιῶ
KJV: from heaven, not to doINT: heaven not that I should do
John 6:42 Adv
GRK: καὶ ἔλεγον οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν
INT: And were saying not this Is
John 6:46 Adv
GRK: οὐχ ὅτι τὸν
KJV: Not that any man
INT: not that the
John 7:22 Adv
GRK: τὴν περιτομήν οὐχ ὅτι ἐκ
KJV: circumcision; (not because
INT: circumcision not that of
John 7:25 Adv
GRK: τῶν Ἱεροσολυμιτῶν Οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν
KJV: Is not this
INT: those of Jerusalem not this Is he
John 7:34 Adv
GRK: με καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ με
KJV: and shall not find [me]: and
INT: me and not will find me
John 7:35 Adv
GRK: ὅτι ἡμεῖς οὐχ εὑρήσομεν αὐτόν
KJV: we shall not find him?
INT: that we not will find him
John 7:36 Adv
GRK: με καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ με
KJV: and shall not find [me]: and
INT: me and not will find me
John 7:42 Adv
GRK: οὐχ ἡ γραφὴ
INT: Not the Scripture
John 9:8 Adv
GRK: ἦν ἔλεγον Οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν
KJV: said, Is not this he that sat
INT: he was said Not this is
John 10:28 Adv
GRK: αἰῶνα καὶ οὐχ ἁρπάσει τις
NAS: perish; and no one
INT: age and never will seize anyone
John 11:52 Adv
GRK: καὶ οὐχ ὑπὲρ τοῦ
KJV: And not for that nation
INT: and not for the
John 12:6 Adv
GRK: δὲ τοῦτο οὐχ ὅτι περὶ
KJV: This he said, not that he
INT: however this not that for
John 12:42 Adv
GRK: τοὺς Φαρισαίους οὐχ ὡμολόγουν ἵνα
KJV: they did not confess
INT: the Pharisees not they confessed that
John 14:22 Adv
GRK: αὐτῷ Ἰούδας οὐχ ὁ Ἰσκαριώτης
KJV: saith unto him, not Iscariot, Lord,
INT: to him Judas not the Iscariot
John 15:16 Adv
GRK: οὐχ ὑμεῖς με
KJV: Ye have not chosen me,
INT: Not you me
οὔπω
NOT YET
οὔπω
Not yet
Adv
οὔπω Part of Speech: Adverb, Negative Transliteration: oupó Phonetic Spelling: (oo'-po) Definition: not yet Usage: not yet.
From ou and po; not yet – hitherto not, (no…) As yet, not yet.
#NAME?: yet, even Original Word: -πω Transliteration: #NAME? Phonetic Spelling: (po) Definition: yet, even
Another form of the base of pos; an enclitic particle of indefiniteness; yet, even; used only in the comparative. See medepo, mepo, oudepo, oupo, popote.
οὔτε
NEITHER
From οὐ (“not”) + τε (“and”)
οὔτε
neither
Conj
Conjunction τε • (te) and, also or untranslatable (after each item in a list) and (combined with καί (kaí), untranslatable)
τε is usually considered to denote a weaker connection than καί (kaí). As an enclitic, it is placed after the word that it connects, or after the first word of a phrase that it connects:
οὐδὲ
NEITHER - NOR
οὐδὲ (oude) — 135 Occurrences Matthew 5:15 Adv GRK: οὐδὲ καίουσιν λύχνον NAS: nor does [anyone] light a lamp KJV: Neither do men light a candle, INT: Nor do they light a lamp
Matthew 6:15 Adv GRK: παραπτώματα αὐτῶν οὐδὲ ὁ πατὴρ NAS: others, then your Father KJV: trespasses, neither will your INT: trespasses of them neither the Father
Matthew 6:20 Adv GRK: οὐ διορύσσουσιν οὐδὲ κλέπτουσιν NAS: thieves do not break in or steal; KJV: not break through nor steal: INT: not do break in nor steal
Matthew 6:26 Adv GRK: οὐ σπείρουσιν οὐδὲ θερίζουσιν οὐδὲ NAS: that they do not sow, nor reap KJV: not, neither do they reap, INT: not they sow nor do they reap nor
Matthew 6:26 Adv
GRK: οὐδὲ θερίζουσιν οὐδὲ συνάγουσιν εἰς
NAS: nor reap nor gather into barns,
KJV: neither do they reap, nor gather into
INT: nor do they reap nor do they gather into
Matthew 6:28 Adv
GRK: οὐ κοπιῶσιν οὐδὲ νήθουσιν
NAS: they do not toil nor do they spin,
KJV: they toil not, neither do they spin:
INT: [they do] not labor nor do they spin
Matthew 6:29 Adv GRK: ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐδὲ Σολομὼν ἐν NAS: I say to you that not even Solomon KJV: glory was not arrayed like INT: to you that not even Solomon in
Matthew 7:18 Adv GRK: πονηροὺς ποιεῖν οὐδὲ δένδρον σαπρὸν NAS: bad fruit, nor can a bad tree KJV: fruit, neither [can] a corrupt INT: evil to produce nor a tree bad
Matthew 9:17 Adv GRK: οὐδὲ βάλλουσιν οἶνον NAS: Nor do [people] put new KJV: Neither do men put new INT: Nor put they wine
Matthew 10:24 Adv GRK: τὸν διδάσκαλον οὐδὲ δοῦλος ὑπὲρ NAS: his teacher, nor a slave KJV: [his] master, nor the servant INT: the teacher nor a servant above
οὐκέτι
NO MORE - NOT ANYMORE - NO LONGER - NOT REMAIN
Οὐκέτι
No longer
Adv
ouketi: no longer, no more
Original Word: οὐκέτι Part of Speech: Adverb, Negative Transliteration: ouketi Phonetic Spelling: (ook-et'-ee) Definition: no longer, no more Usage: no longer, no more.
οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition.
éti (an adverb) – properly, continue (remain).
Οὐκέτι
NOT YET - NO LONGER
From οὐκ (not) + ἔτι (yet)
Οὐκέτι
No longer
Adv
From οὐκ (not) + ἔτι (yet)
ou, ouk, ouch: not, no
οὐ
οὐχ
οὐκ
Original Word: οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition.
οὐκέτι
NOT YET - NOT A FACT YET
From οὐ (negates facts) + ἔτι (still, yet)
οὐκέτι Part of Speech: Adverb, Negative Transliteration: ouketi Phonetic Spelling: (ook-et'-ee) Definition: no longer, no more Usage: no longer, no more.
οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
3756 ou – no (“not”). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition. HELPS Word-studies 2089 éti (an adverb) – properly, continue (remain).
οὐκέτι
NO LONGER - NO MORE - NOT YET - NOT STILL
From οὐκ / οὐ (not) + ἔτι (yet, still, remain)
ouketi: no longer, no more
Original Word: ouketi: no longer, no more Original Word: οὐκέτι Part of Speech: Adverb, Negative Transliteration: ouketi Phonetic Spelling: (ook-et'-ee) Definition: no longer, no more Usage: no longer, no more.
Word Origin
from ou, and eti
———————————————
eti: still, yet
Original Word: ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition. HELPS Word-studies 2089 éti (an adverb) – properly, continue (remain).
———————————————-
ou, ouk, ouch: not, no
Original Word: οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
3756 ou – no (“not”). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
οὐ — 699 Occ.
οὐχ — 105 Occ.
οὐκ — 830 Occ.
οὐκέτι
YET, NOT ANY LONGER - YET, NO MORE
οὐκέτι Part of Speech: Adverb, Negative Transliteration: ouketi Phonetic Spelling: (ook-et'-ee) Definition: no longer, no more Usage: no longer, no more.
οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition.
2089 éti (an adverb) – properly, continue (remain).
οὐ μὴ
NOT THEN - NOT NOW - NOT TO COME
If not then, and if not now, then not when?
———————————————————-
John 4:48
Therefore Jesus said to him, with all these signs and wonders you all have seen, what will it take for you to believe?
Εἶπεν οὖν Ἰησοῦς πρὸς αὐτόν; Ἐὰν μὴ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἴδητε οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε;
Said therefore Jesus to him, if not signs and wonders all you people see, if not then, and if not now, then when not will you all believe?
On the other hand, a modern version could be Anti-climatic…
What the “blank” is going on behind the curtain? Is the drama progressing properly? This is act 144! Is getting old! Could we please get to the point of the plot? We are all about to leave the theater, regardless of the very high price we paid for these front row seats!
—————————————————————
οὐ
no
Adv
μὴ
not
Adv
οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
3756 ou – no (“not”). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, “ruling it out as fact.”
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
——————————————————-
μή Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: mé Phonetic Spelling: (may) Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation) Usage: not, lest.
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates “subjectively,” ruling out any implications (“suggestions”) that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
———————————————————-
τέρας, ατος, τό Part of Speech: Noun, Neuter Transliteration: teras Phonetic Spelling: (ter'-as) Definition: a wonder, marvel Usage: a wonder, portent, marvel.
5059 téras – a miraculous wonder, done to elicit a reaction from onlookers; an extraordinary event with its supernatural effect left on all witnessing it, i.e. a portent from heaven to earth.
wonder.
Of uncertain affinity; a prodigy or omen – wonder.
from Homer down, the Sept. for מופֵת, a prodigy, portent; miracle (A. V. wonder) performed by anyone; in the N. T. it is found only in the plural and joined with σημεῖα
accordingly something so strange and marvelous as to cause it to be ‘watched’ or ‘observed’
others connect it with ἀστήρ, ἀστραπή, etc.
hence, ‘a sign in the heavens’
———————————————————- σημεῖον, ου, τό Part of Speech: Noun, Neuter Transliteration: sémeion Phonetic Spelling: (say-mi'-on) Definition: a sign Usage: a sign, miracle, indication, mark, token.
4592 sēmeíon – a sign (typically miraculous), given especially to confirm, corroborate or authenticate. 4592 /sēmeíon (“sign”) then emphasizes the end-purpose which exalts the one giving it. Accordingly, it is used dozens of times in the NT for what authenticates the Lord and His eternal purpose, especially by doing what mere man can not replicate of take credit for.
μήτι
NOT BE? - CAN IT NOT BE? - CAN THIS BE? - REALLY?
From μή (not) + τι - τις (anyone, someone, something)
μήτι: can this be? (interrog. particle expecting a neg. answer)
μήτι
Can it be [that]
IntPrtcl
from mé and the neut. of tis
Original Word: μήτι Part of Speech: Particle, Interrogative Transliteration: méti Phonetic Spelling: (may'-tee) Definition: can this be? (interrogative particle expecting a negative answer) Usage: if not, unless, whether at all.
3385 mḗti (from 3361 /mḗ, “not” and 5101 /tís, “anything”) – properly, not perhaps, “no on first blush (reaction)” – while still keeping “the possibility open” to elicit the desired reaction from the listener (reader). 3385 (mḗti) then draws out an immediate “no,” while still conjuring the idea, “unless . . . “.
Example: Jn 4:29: “Come, see a man who told me all the things that I have done; this is not (3385 /mḗti) the Christ, is it?” (NASU).
A. T. Robertson, “Is not this the Christ (3385 /mḗti) . . . “ elicits “the negative answer (‘this cannot be’) . . . ‘unless He really is the Christ!’ (holding out the ‘diplomatic possibility’) and thus heightening their interest” (WS, 429,30).
————————————————————-
Strong’s Concordance
mé: not, that…not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Original Word: μή Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: mé Phonetic Spelling: (may) Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation) Usage: not, lest.
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates “subjectively,” ruling out any implications (“suggestions”) that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
————————————————————-
tis: a certain one, someone, anyone
Original Word: τις, τι Part of Speech: Indefinite Pronoun Transliteration: tis Phonetic Spelling: (tis) Definition: a certain one, someone, anyone Usage: any one, some one, a certain one or thing. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin a prim. enclitic indef. pronoun Definition a certain one, someone, anyone
a certain, a certain one; used of persons and things concerning which the writer either cannot or will not speak more particularly;
οὐδὲ οὐδείς οὐδεμία οὐδέν οὐδένα εἷς, μία, ἕν οὐ δέ
NO ONE - NOTHING AT ALL
οὐδὲ
Not even
Adv
οὐδένα
no one
Adj-AMS
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: oudeis and outheis, oudemia, ouden and outhen Phonetic Spelling: (oo-dice') Definition: no one, none Usage: no one, none, nothing. HELPS Word-studies 3762 oudeís (from 3756 /ou "no, not" and 1520 /heís, "one") – properly, not one; no one, nothing.
οὐδέ Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative Transliteration: oude Phonetic Spelling: (oo-deh') Definition: and not, neither Usage: neither, nor, not even, and not. HELPS Word-studies 3761 oudé (from 3756 /ou, "not" and 1161 /dé, "moreover") – properly, moreover not, neither indeed, not even, nor even.
3761 /oudé (“neither indeed,” “nor indeed”) introduces a statement that is negated factually and deductively (it occurs 137 times in the NT). That is, the negation rules out (invalidates) the statement that precedes it, and what naturally extends from it. This is analogous to the following: Because 100 is not enough, then neither are 90, 80, or 70 because they are all included in 100. Thus if “A” (100 in the previous example) is invalid, so is what necessarily follows (statement “B” – 90, 80, 70).
[Regardless of how 3761 (oudé) is translated, it means: If “A” (the preceding statement) isn’t true (valid) – then “B” (which extends from it) is also not valid. As in the previous example: If 100 is not enough (valid), then automatically neither are 90, 80, 70, etc.]
3762 /oudeís (“no one, nothing at all”) is a powerful negating conjunction. It rules out by definition, i.e. “shuts the door” objectively and leaves no exceptions. 3762 (oudeís) is deductive in force so it excludes every (any) example that is included withing the premise (supposition).
[3762 /oudeís (“not one, none”) categorically excludes, declaring as a fact that no valid example exists.]
δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
HELPS Word-studies
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . . .
εἷς, μία, ἕν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: heis Phonetic Spelling: (hice) Definition: one Usage: one.
μη ου ουδ’ ουδε ουδέ ουδεις ουδείς ούδείς οὐδείς Οὐδεὶς ουδεμια ουδεμιά ουδεμία οὐδεμία ουδεμιαν ουδεμίαν οὐδεμίαν ουδεν ουδέν οὐδέν οὐδὲν ουδενα ουδένα οὐδένα ουδενι ουδενί ούδενι οὐδενὶ ουδενος ουδενός οὐδενός οὐδενὸς ουθείς ουθεν ουθέν οὐθέν οὐθὲν Ουθενος ουθενός Οὐθενός
οὐδεὶς
NO ONE
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: oudeis and outheis, oudemia, ouden and outhen Phonetic Spelling: (oo-dice') Definition: no one, none Usage: no one, none, nothing. HELPS Word-studies 3762 oudeís (from 3756 /ou "no, not" and 1520 /heís, "one") – properly, not one; no one, nothing.
3762 /oudeís (“no one, nothing at all”) is a powerful negating conjunction. It rules out by definition, i.e. “shuts the door” objectively and leaves no exceptions. 3762 (oudeís) is deductive in force so it excludes every (any) example that is included withing the premise (supposition).
[3762 /oudeís (“not one, none”) categorically excludes, declaring as a fact that no valid example exists.]
Οὐδεὶς (Oudeis) — 98 Occurrences Matthew 6:24 Adj-NMS GRK: Οὐδεὶς δύναται δυσὶ NAS: No one can serve KJV: No man can serve INT: No one is able two
Matthew 9:16 Adj-NMS GRK: οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐπιβάλλει NAS: But no one puts a patch KJV: No man putteth a piece INT: no one moreover puts
Matthew 11:27 Adj-NMS GRK: μου καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐπιγινώσκει τὸν NAS: to Me by My Father; and no one knows KJV: Father: and no man knoweth the Son, INT: of me And no one knows the
Matthew 20:7 Adj-NMS GRK: αὐτῷ Ὅτι οὐδεὶς ἡμᾶς ἐμισθώσατο NAS: to him, 'Because no one hired KJV: Because no man hath hired INT: to him Because no one us has hired
Matthew 22:46 Adj-NMS GRK: καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι NAS: No one was able to answer KJV: And no man was able to answer INT: And no one was able to answer
Matthew 24:36 Adj-NMS GRK: καὶ ὥρας οὐδεὶς οἶδεν οὐδὲ NAS: and hour no one knows, KJV: knoweth no [man], no, not INT: and hour no one knows not even
Mark 2:21 Adj-NMS GRK: οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους NAS: No one sews a patch KJV: No man also seweth INT: no one a piece of cloth
Mark 2:22 Adj-NMS GRK: καὶ οὐδεὶς βάλλει οἶνον NAS: No one puts new KJV: And no man putteth new INT: And no one puts wine
Mark 3:27 Adj-NMS GRK: οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν NAS: But no one can enter KJV: No man can enter INT: not is able no one into the
Mark 5:3 Adj-NMS GRK: ἁλύσει οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν NAS: And no one was able KJV: the tombs; and no man could bind INT: with chains no longer anyone was able him
Mark 5:4 Adj-NMS
GRK: συντετρίφθαι καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν
NAS: broken in pieces, and no one was strong enough
INT: had been shattered and no one was able him
οὐδέν
IN NO WAY
From Ancient Greek οὐδέν (oudén, “in no way”).
Pronunciation
IPA(key): /ðen/
Particle
δεν • (den) (negating particle)
not
Δεν ήρθα χθες στο γραφείο. ― Den írtha chthes sto grafeío. ― I didn’t come to the office yesterday.
Δεν έρχεσαι μαζί μας; ― Den érchesai mazí mas? ― Won’t you come with us?
not (with stress on the negative aspect of a statement)
Πήρε δεν πήρε εκατό ευρώ. ― Píre den píre ekató evró. ― He didn’t even get one hundred euros.
Usage notes[edit]
This form is used only when the following letter is a vowel or a plosive consonant (κ, τ, π, ξ, ψ, γκ, ντ, μπ).
δεν (den) and δε (de) are used with indicative verb forms, but μην (min) and μη (mi) are used with subjunctive verbs and imperatives.
Synonyms[edit]
μην (min), μη (mi)
οὐδέν
οὐδένα
οὐδείς
οὐδεμία
οὐ + δέ + εἷς
εἷς, μία, ἕν
NO ONE
οὐδένα
no one
Adj-AMS
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: oudeis and outheis, oudemia, ouden and outhen Phonetic Spelling: (oo-dice') Definition: no one, none Usage: no one, none, nothing. HELPS Word-studies 3762 oudeís (from 3756 /ou "no, not" and 1520 /heís, "one") – properly, not one; no one, nothing.
3762 /oudeís (“no one, nothing at all”) is a powerful negating conjunction. It rules out by definition, i.e. “shuts the door” objectively and leaves no exceptions. 3762 (oudeís) is deductive in force so it excludes every (any) example that is included withing the premise (supposition).
[3762 /oudeís (“not one, none”) categorically excludes, declaring as a fact that no valid example exists.]
none, no one
Including feminine oudemia (oo-dem-ee’-ah), and neuter ouden (oo-den’) from oude and heis; not even one (man, woman or thing), i.e. None, nobody, nothing – any (man), aught, man, neither any (thing), never (man), no (man), none (+ of these things), not (any, at all, -thing), nought.
οὐδέ Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative Transliteration: oude Phonetic Spelling: (oo-deh') Definition: and not, neither Usage: neither, nor, not even, and not. HELPS Word-studies 3761 oudé (from 3756 /ou, "not" and 1161 /dé, "moreover") – properly, moreover not, neither indeed, not even, nor even.
3761 /oudé (“neither indeed,” “nor indeed”) introduces a statement that is negated factually and deductively (it occurs 137 times in the NT). That is, the negation rules out (invalidates) the statement that precedes it, and what naturally extends from it. This is analogous to the following: Because 100 is not enough, then neither are 90, 80, or 70 because they are all included in 100. Thus if “A” (100 in the previous example) is invalid, so is what necessarily follows (statement “B” – 90, 80, 70).
[Regardless of how 3761 (oudé) is translated, it means: If “A” (the preceding statement) isn’t true (valid) – then “B” (which extends from it) is also not valid. As in the previous example: If 100 is not enough (valid), then automatically neither are 90, 80, 70, etc.]
οὐ
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch
Phonetic Spelling: (oo)
Definition: not, no
Usage: no, not.
HELPS Word-studies
3756 ou – no ("not"). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, "ruling it out as fact."
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
HELPS Word-studies
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . . .
εἷς, μία, ἕν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: heis Phonetic Spelling: (hice) Definition: one Usage: one.
μη ου ουδ' ουδε ουδέ ουδεις ουδείς ούδείς οὐδείς Οὐδεὶς ουδεμια ουδεμιά ουδεμία οὐδεμία ουδεμιαν ουδεμίαν οὐδεμίαν ουδεν ουδέν οὐδέν οὐδὲν ουδενα ουδένα οὐδένα ουδενι ουδενί ούδενι οὐδενὶ ουδενος ουδενός οὐδενός οὐδενὸς ουθείς ουθεν ουθέν οὐθέν οὐθὲν Ουθενος ουθενός Οὐθενός
μὴ οὐκ
NEITHER - NEVER
mé ouk: neither, never, not. Original Word: μὴ Transliteration: mé ouk Phonetic Spelling: (may ook) Definition: neither, never, not
Particle[edit]
οὐκ • (ouk) (negative particle)
Alternative form of οὐ (ou), used before a vowel with smooth breathing
ou, ouk, ouch: not, no Original Word: οὐ Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch Phonetic Spelling: (oo) Definition: not, no Usage: no, not.
Matthew 1:25 Adv GRK: καὶ οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτὴν NAS: but kept her a virgin until KJV: her not till INT: and not knew her Matthew 2:18 Adv GRK: αὐτῆς καὶ οὐκ ἤθελεν παρακληθῆναι NAS: FOR HER CHILDREN; AND SHE REFUSED TO BE COMFORTED, KJV: and would not be comforted, because INT: of her and not would be comforted
Matthew 2:18 Adv GRK: παρακληθῆναι ὅτι οὐκ εἰσίν NAS: BECAUSE THEY WERE NO MORE. KJV: because they are not. INT: be comforted because no more are they
Matthew 3:11 Adv
GRK: ἐστίν οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς
KJV: shoes I am not worthy to bear:
INT: is he of whom not I am fit
Matthew 4:4 Adv
GRK: εἶπεν Γέγραπται Οὐκ ἐπ’ ἄρτῳ
KJV: Man shall not live by
INT: he said It has been written Not by bread
Matthew 4:7 Adv
GRK: Πάλιν γέγραπται Οὐκ ἐκπειράσεις Κύριον
KJV: again, Thou shalt not tempt the Lord
INT: Again it has been written not You will test [the] Lord
Matthew 5:14 Adv
GRK: τοῦ κόσμου οὐ δύναται πόλις
KJV: on an hill cannot be hid.
INT: of the world not is able A city
Matthew 5:17 Adv
GRK: τοὺς προφήτας οὐκ ἦλθον καταλῦσαι
KJV: I am not come
INT: the prophets not I came to abolish
Matthew 5:18 Adv
GRK: μία κεραία οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ
INT: one tittle no not shall pass away
Matthew 5:20 Adv
GRK: καὶ Φαρισαίων οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθητε
INT: and Pharisees no not shall you enter
Matthew 5:21 Adv
GRK: τοῖς ἀρχαίοις Οὐ φονεύσεις ὃς
KJV: Thou shalt not kill;
INT: to the ancients not You will murder whoever
Matthew 5:26 Adv
GRK: λέγω σοι οὐ μὴ ἐξέλθῃς
INT: I say to you no not shall you come out
Matthew 5:27 Adv
GRK: ὅτι ἐρρέθη Οὐ μοιχεύσεις
KJV: Thou shalt not commit adultery:
INT: that it was said not You will commit adultery
Matthew 5:33 Adv
GRK: τοῖς ἀρχαίοις Οὐκ ἐπιορκήσεις ἀποδώσεις
KJV: Thou shalt not forswear thyself,
INT: to the ancients not You will swear falsely you will keep
Matthew 5:36 Adv
GRK: ὀμόσῃς ὅτι οὐ δύνασαι μίαν
KJV: because thou canst not make one
INT: shall you swear because not you are able one
Matthew 5:37 Adv GRK: ναὶ ναί οὒ οὔ τὸ NAS: yes [or] 'No, no; KJV: Yea, yea; Nay, nay: for INT: Yes yes no no [anything]
Matthew 5:37 Adv GRK: ναί οὒ οὔ τὸ δὲ NAS: [or] 'No, no; anything beyond KJV: yea; Nay, nay: for whatsoever is more INT: yes no no [anything] moreover
Matthew 6:1 Adv GRK: μή¦γε μισθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε παρὰ NAS: you have no reward KJV: otherwise ye have no reward of INT: lest reward no you have with
Matthew 6:5 Adv
GRK: ὅταν προσεύχησθε οὐκ ἔσεσθε ὡς
KJV: thou prayest, thou shalt not be as
INT: when you pray not you will be as
Matthew 6:20 Adv
GRK: ὅπου κλέπται οὐ διορύσσουσιν οὐδὲ
KJV: thieves do not break through nor
INT: where theives not do break in nor
Matthew 6:24 Adv
GRK: ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει οὐ δύνασθε θεῷ
KJV: despise the other. Ye cannot serve God
INT: other he will despise not You are able God
Matthew 6:26 Adv
GRK: οὐρανοῦ ὅτι οὐ σπείρουσιν οὐδὲ
KJV: they sow not, neither
INT: air that not they sow nor
Matthew 6:26 Adv
GRK: τρέφει αὐτά οὐχ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλον
KJV: Are ye not much better than
INT: feeds them not you much
Matthew 6:28 Adv
GRK: πῶς αὐξάνουσιν οὐ κοπιῶσιν οὐδὲ
KJV: they toil not, neither
INT: how they grow [they do] not labor nor
Matthew 6:30 Adv
GRK: οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον
KJV: the oven, [shall he] not much
INT: thus clothes [will he] not much more
Strong’s Greek 3756
1634 Occurrences
οὐ — 699 Occ.
οὐχ — 105 Occ.
οὐκ — 830 Occ.
μηδέ
μή (not least) + δέ (but, moreover, on the other hand)
BUT NOT - YET NOT ON THE OTHER HAND
from mé and de
méde: but not, and not Original Word: μηδέ Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative Transliteration: méde Phonetic Spelling: (may-deh') Definition: but not, and not Usage: and not, not even, neither…nor. HELPS Word-studies 3366 mēdé (a conjunction, derived from 3361 /mḗ, "subjectively not" and 1161 /dé, "moreover, next") – properly, not even, nor moreover, neither.
de: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Original Word: δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
HELPS Word-studies
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . . .
but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
NASB Translation
after (2), also (2), another* (8), even (4), even though (1), former* (1), however (6), moreover (1), moreover* (1), nevertheless (1), now (267), or (6), other (1), other hand (4), others* (3), partly (1), rather (1), so (12), suppose* (1), then (6), therefore (1), though (1), what (1), when (3), whereas (2), yes (1), yet (25).
μή
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: mé
Phonetic Spelling: (may)
Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Usage: not, lest.
HELPS Word-studies
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates "subjectively," ruling out any implications ("suggestions") that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
οὐδείς
οὐδεμία
οὐδέν
εἷς
μία
ἕν
NOT ONE
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: oudeis and outheis, oudemia, ouden and outhen Phonetic Spelling: (oo-dice') Definition: no one, none Usage: no one, none, nothing. HELPS Word-studies 3762 oudeís (from 3756 /ou "no, not" and 1520 /heís, "one") – properly, not one; no one, nothing.
3762 /oudeís (“no one, nothing at all”) is a powerful negating conjunction. It rules out by definition, i.e. “shuts the door” objectively and leaves no exceptions. 3762 (oudeís) is deductive in force so it excludes every (any) example that is included withing the premise (supposition).
[3762 /oudeís (“not one, none”) categorically excludes, declaring as a fact that no valid example exists.]
οὐδέ Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative Transliteration: oude Phonetic Spelling: (oo-deh') Definition: and not, neither Usage: neither, nor, not even, and not. HELPS Word-studies 3761 oudé (from 3756 /ou, "not" and 1161 /dé, "moreover") – properly, moreover not, neither indeed, not even, nor even.
3761 /oudé (“neither indeed,” “nor indeed”) introduces a statement that is negated factually and deductively (it occurs 137 times in the NT). That is, the negation rules out (invalidates) the statement that precedes it, and what naturally extends from it. This is analogous to the following: Because 100 is not enough, then neither are 90, 80, or 70 because they are all included in 100. Thus if “A” (100 in the previous example) is invalid, so is what necessarily follows (statement “B” – 90, 80, 70).
[Regardless of how 3761 (oudé) is translated, it means: If “A” (the preceding statement) isn’t true (valid) – then “B” (which extends from it) is also not valid. As in the previous example: If 100 is not enough (valid), then automatically neither are 90, 80, 70, etc.]
οὐ
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: ou, ouk, ouch
Phonetic Spelling: (oo)
Definition: not, no
Usage: no, not.
HELPS Word-studies
3756 ou – no ("not"). 3756 (ou) objectively negates a statement, "ruling it out as fact."
[3756 (ou) is written ouk before smooth breathings and oux before a rough breathing.]
εἷς, μία, ἕν Part of Speech: Adjective Transliteration: heis Phonetic Spelling: (hice) Definition: one Usage: one.
de: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Original Word: δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
HELPS Word-studies
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . .
εἷς, μία, ἐν, genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, a cardinal numeral, one
with a negative following joined to the verb, εἰς … οὐ or μή (one … not, i. e.) no one, (more explicit and emphatic than οὐδείς
μή οὐ
NEVER
ou mé: anymore, at all, neither, never
Original Word: οὐ
Transliteration: ou mé
Phonetic Spelling: (oo may)
Definition: anymore, at all, neither, never
HELPS Word-studies
3364 ou mḗ (from 3756 /ou, “ not a fact” and 3361 /mḗ, “not a possibility”) – a double negative which emphatically conveys, “not a fact . . . not even a possibility!” – literally, “no, no!”
[In English, a double negative has a positive meaning. In Greek, a double negative is extra-emphatic, expressing very dramatic, forceful negation.]
anymore, at all, neither, never
I.e. ou and me; a double negative strengthening the denial; not at all – any more, at all, by any (no) means, neither, never, no (at all), in no case (wise), nor ever, not (at all, in any wise). Compare me ouk.
see GREEK me
see GREEK me ouk
see GREEK ou
μηκέτι
NOT ANYMORE - NOT POSSIBLE YET
From μή (negates a possibility) + ἔτι (still, yet, to remain)
μηκέτι Part of Speech: Adverb, Negative Transliteration: méketi Phonetic Spelling: (may-ket'-ee) Definition: no longer, not anymore Usage: no longer, no more.
from mé and eti
μή / mé: “not, that…not, lest” (used for qualified negation)
Original Word: μή Part of Speech: Particle, Negative Transliteration: mé Phonetic Spelling: (may) Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation) Usage: not, lest.
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates “subjectively,” ruling out any implications (“suggestions”) that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
ἔτι Part of Speech: Adverb Transliteration: eti Phonetic Spelling: (et'-ee) Definition: still, yet Usage: (a) of time: still, yet, even now, (b) of degree: even, further, more, in addition.
2089 éti (an adverb) – properly, continue (remain).
ἐὰν μή
IF NOT - BUT NOT - EXCEPT NOT
ean mé: before, but, except
Original Word: ἐὰν
Transliteration: ean mé
Phonetic Spelling: (eh-an’ may)
Definition: before, but, except
3362 eán mḗ (consisting of 1437 /eán, “if” and 3361 /mḗ, “not”) – unless; literally, “if not.”
μή
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: mé
Phonetic Spelling: (may)
Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Usage: not, lest.
HELPS Word-studies
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates "subjectively," ruling out any implications ("suggestions") that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
μηδέπω
NAME?: yet, even
NOT YET EVER - ON THE OTHER HAND - NOT EVEN YET
μηδέπω Part of Speech: Adverb, Negative Transliteration: médepó Phonetic Spelling: (may-dep'-o) Definition: not yet Usage: not yet. NAS Exhaustive Concordance Word Origin from méde and #NAME?
méde: but not, and not Original Word: μηδέ Part of Speech: Conjunction,Negative Transliteration: méde Phonetic Spelling: (may-deh') Definition: but not, and not Usage: and not, not even, neither…nor. HELPS Word-studies 3366 mēdé (a conjunction, derived from 3361 /mḗ, "subjectively not" and 1161 /dé, "moreover, next") – properly, not even, nor moreover, neither.
—————————————————————-
μή
μή
Part of Speech: Particle, Negative
Transliteration: mé
Phonetic Spelling: (may)
Definition: not, that...not, lest (used for qualified negation)
Usage: not, lest.
HELPS Word-studies
3361 mḗ (a particle which functions as an adverb) – no, not. 3361 (mḗ) negates "subjectively," ruling out any implications ("suggestions") that could be involved with what should (could, would) apply.
3361 /mḗ (“not”) negates the underlying idea (concept) of a statement, ruling out its possibilities, i.e. all that it suggests on a conceptual or hypothetical plane.
[3361 /mḗ (“not, no”) then negates the implications (suggestions) that naturally spring from the negated statement.]
not, that…not, lest (used for qualified negation)
—————————————————————-
δέ
moreover, indeed, but, on the other hand
de: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Original Word: δέ
Part of Speech: Conjunction
Transliteration: de
Phonetic Spelling: (deh)
Definition: but, and, now, (a connective or adversative particle)
Usage: a weak adversative particle, generally placed second in its clause; but, on the other hand, and.
1161 dé (a conjunction) – moreover, indeed now . . . , on top of this . . . , next . . .
—————————————————————-
πω
yet, even
Original Word: -πω
Transliteration: #NAME?
Phonetic Spelling: (po)
Definition: yet, even
NAS Exhaustive Concordance
Word Origin
enclitic particle used as suffix or prefix, see médepó, mépó, oudepó, oupó, and pópote.
yet, even
Another form of the base of pos; an enclitic particle of indefiniteness; yet, even; used only in the comparative. See medepo, mepo, oudepo, oupo, popote.
see GREEK pos
see GREEK medepo
see GREEK mepo
see GREEK oudepo
see GREEK oupo
see GREEK popote
